I LLt -The 1996 Pontiac Bonneville Owner’s Manual

Seats and Restraint Systems ...... 1-1 This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains“SRS” the system. Features and Controls ...... ;...... 2-1 This section explainshow to start and operate your Pontiac. Comfort Controls and Audio Systems ...... 3-1 This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls andhow to operate your audio system. . Your Driving and the Road ...... 4-1 Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the roadhow and to drive under different conditions. ProblemsontheRoad ...... 5-1 This section tells you whatto do if you have a problem whiledriving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc. Service and Appearance Care...... 6-1 Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your Pontiacrunning properly and looking good. Maintenanceschedule...... 7-1 This section tellp you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluidsand lubricants to use. Customer Assistance Information ... .#...... 8-1 \ This section tells youhow to contact Pontiac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects”on page 8-9. Index ...... 9-1 Here’s an alphabetical listing ofalmost every subject in this manual.You can use it to quickly find something you. want to read. We support voluntary technician certification.

CERTIFIED GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem, IL WE SUPPORT PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN BONNEVILLE are registered trademarks of General CERTIFICATION THROUGH Motors Corporation. National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE This manual includes the latest information at the it time EXCELILENCE was printed. We reserve theright to make changesin the product afterthat time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Limited"for Pontiac For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a Division whenever it appearsin this manual. French Language Manual: Please keep this manualin your Pontiac, so it will be Aux propribtaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous there if you ever need it when you're on' the road.If you procurer un exemplaire dece guide en franGais chez sell the vehicle, please leave this manualit soin the new votre concessionaireou au: owner canuse it. DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga, Ontario L5T1C7

Litho in U.S.A. 'Copyright General Motors Corporation 1995 Part No. 10273 198 .B First Edition All Rights Reserved ii 1 How to Use This Manual Many people read their owner’s manualfrom beginning /1\ CAUTIGN: to end when theyfirst receive theirnew vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and These mean thereis something that could hurt controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that you or other people. pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazardis. Then Index we tell you what todo to help avoid or reduce the A good place to lookfor what you needis the Indexin hazard. Please read these cautions.If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. the backof the manual. It’san alphabetical listof all that’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. You will also finda circle with a slash throughit in Safety Warnings and Symbols this book. This safety symbol means“Don’t,’’ You will find a numberof safety cautions in this book. “Don’t do this,”or “Don’t We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about let this happen.” things that couldhurt you if you were toignore the warning.

iii Vehicle DamageWarnings In the notice =ea, we tell you aboutsomething that can damage your vehicle. Mafly times, this damage would Also, in this book you will find thesenotices: not be coveredby your warranty, and it could be costly But the notice will tellyou what to do to help avoid the NOTICE: damage. "When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION These mean there is something that could and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in differat words. 1 damage your vehicle. You'll also see warning labelson your vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some these symbols are important have to do with are on someof are used on other symbols are used onan for you and your lights: your controls: warning and you may see: original battery: your passengers indicator lights: whenever your vehicle is CAUTION driven: POSSIBLE A WIPER Q ENGINE FUSE INJURY COOLANT - e- f-l TEMP - DOOR LOCK TURN PROTECT SIGNALS EYES BY UNLOCK e BATTERY LIGHTER m SHIELDING CHARGING I-1 SYSTEM PARKING p$ CAUSTIC LAMPS WINDSHIELD HORN FASTEN DEFROSTER )tr SEAT BRAKE (0) BELTS BURNS COOLANT SPEAKER AVOID a b SPARKS OR FLAMES ENGINE OIL PRESSURE e,FUEL SPARK OR ,\I/, p3 RAM€ VENTILATING COULD e? ANTI~LOCK EXPLODE AIR BAG p\ FOG LAMPS FAN ) (@) $0 BRAKES BATTERY - v NOTES

vi Section, 1 Seats and -Restraint Systems

~~~~

Here you’llfind information about the seats in your ManualFront Seat Pontiac and how to use your safety belts properly.You

~~ ._ can also learn about somethkgs you should not do with air bags and safety belts. A CAUTION: Seats and Seat Controls You can lose control of the vehicle if youto try t ,.:’ This section,tellsyou aboutthe seats -- how to adjust adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis them -- and also about reclining seatbacks and head restraints. moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Pull up on the control bar under thefront of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the bar andtry to move the seat withyour body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.

I

1-1 Power Seat (Option) Center Control (B): Move the seat forward by pressing the control forward, or backwardby pressing the control To adjust the power seatson backward. some mkls: , Move the seat higherby holding the controlup. Lower the ,seatby holding the control down. Rear Control (C): Raise the rearof the seatby holding the switchup. Lower therew of the seatby holding the switch down. Power Lumbar Controls (Option) d! Reshapes the lower back area of the seat. Front Control (A): Raise the front of the seat by & Reshapes the middleback kea of the seat. holding the switchup. Lower the front of the seat by holding the switchdown. mk Reshapes the upper back areaof the seat. Adjustable Support Seat (Option) Reclining Front Seatbacks On some models, you'll find the controlson the center console. Slide the selector switch toL or R to choose the front seatyou want to adjust.

-d#. Adjusts the seat forward or back. d Adjusts the seat up or down. Adjusts the seatback to an upright or reclined To adjust the seatback,lift the lever onthe outer sideof position. the seat and movethe seatback to whereyou want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback. Pullon up the lever and the seat will go to an upright position. d-b Adjusts the positionof the seatback side bolsters. 'a Tilts therear of the seat up or down.

A& A& Tilts the front of the seatup or down.

1-3 I

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. The shoulderbelt can’t do its jobbecause it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt can’t do its jobeither. ‘Ina crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. But don’t have a seatback reclinedif your vehicleis For proper protection when the vehicle isin moving. motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Head Restraints Slide the head restraintup or down so that thetop of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chanceof a neck injury in a crash. On some models, the head restraintstilt forward and rearward also. 1-4 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone Your vehicle has a light that comes onas a reminder to This part of the manual tells youhow to use safety belts buckle up. (See “Safety Belt properly. It also tells you some things you should not do Reminder Light” in the with safety, belts. Index.) And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),or air bag system I- I-

Don’t let anyone ride wherehe or she can’t wear In most.states and Canadian provinces, the law says to a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work. you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries You never know if you’ll be in a crash.If you do have a can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the crash, .you don’t knowif it will be a bad one. vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously A few crashes are rnild, and some crashes canbe so injured orkilled. In the same crash,you might serious that even buckled upa person wouldn’t survive. not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your But most crashes arein between. In many of them, people safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. are fastened properlytoo. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

1-5 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anythmg, you go as fast as it goes. c

Put someoneon it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose.it’s justa seat on wheels. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stoppedby something. doesn't stop. In a real vehicle, it couldbe the windshield ...

1-7 or the instrument panel... or the safety 'belts! With safety belts, you slowdown as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop.You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.That's why safety beltsmake such good sense.

1-8 Here Are Questions Many People Ask Q=If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from About Safety Belts-- and the Answers home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be anexcellent driver,but if you’re in an Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident -- even one that isn’.t your fault-- you accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? and your passengerscan be hurt. Being a good You could be -- whether you’re wearinga safety driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your belt or not. But youcan unbuckle a safety belt, control, suchas bad drivers. even if you’re upside down. And your chance of Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of being conscious during and afteran accident, so home. And the greatest numberof serious injuries you can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if and deaths occur at speedsof less than40,mph you are belted. (65 km/h). e.’ If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to Safety beltsare for everyone. wear safety belts? How to Wear Safety Belts Properly A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in Adults most of themin the future. But they are This part is only for peopleof adult size. supplemental systems only;so they work with safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every bag Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety air belts and children. And there are different ‘rules for smaller system ever offered for sale has required the useof children and babies.If a child will beriding in your safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air Pontiac, see the part of this manual called “Children.” bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, First, you’ll want toknow which restraint systemsyour but especiallyin side and other collisions. vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. Driver Position 3. Pick upthe latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Don’t letit get twisted. This part describes the driver’s restraint system. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks. Lap-Shoulder Belt Pull up on the latch plateto make sure it is secure. The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt it properly. Extender” at the endof this section. 1. Close and lock the door. Make sure the release button on the buckleis 2. Adjust the seat (tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index) positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the so you can sit up straight. safety belt quickly if you ever to.had

1-10 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd beless likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locksif there's a sudden stop or crash. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Before you begin todrive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.

To move it down, squeezethe release handle and move the height adjuster to the desired position.You can move the adjusterup just by pushing upon the bottom of the release handle. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the release handleto make sure it has locked into position. Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portionof the belt is centered onyour shoulder. The belt shouldbe away fkom your face and neck, but not fallingoff your shailder.

1-11 @ What's wrong with this?

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly as much protection this way. &: What’s wrong with this? A CAUTION.:

You can be seriously injuredif your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

I I I I I I I I I

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-13 e.'' What's wrong with this? CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, whichwould increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren't as strongas shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

A,: The shuulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

'I , ;* . ,.

.. . I @' What's wrong with this? ITTION:

You can be seriously injuredby a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn't have thefull width of the belt to spread impact forces.If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask

~ your dealer to fix it.

I I I I I I 1 I I I I J

A: The belt is twisted across the body. Your Pontiac hastwo air bags -- one ,air bag forthe driver and another air bag for the right front passenger. Here are the most important things toknow about the air bag system:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing yoursafety belt -- even if you have an air bag. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps seduce yourchance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. The air bag is only a “supplemental restraint.” That is, it works with safety belts but doesn’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle. to severe crashes wherethe frontof your vehicle The belt shouldgo back outof the way. hits something. They aren’t designed to inflateat Before you close the door, be sure the beltis out of the all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the crashes. Everyone in yourvehicle, including belt and your vehicle. the driver, should wear a safety belt Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) properly -- whether or not there’s an air bag for thatperson. This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) or .air bag system.

1-16 I There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which showsAIR Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to aninflating air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position for an air baginflation in a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with an air bag. The drivershould sit as farback L as possible whilestill maintaining controlof the vehicle. The system checks theair bag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electric-al problem. See“Air Bag Readiness Light” inthe Index for more information. I A CAUTIO,. : An inflating air bag can seriously injure small children. Always secure children properlyin your ,.- vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual .. called “Children” and the caution label on the right frontpassenger’s safety belt. How the Air Bag System Works -_

I The right fmnt passe&er’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. Where is the air bag? The driver’s air bag-is in the middleof the steering wheel.

1-18 In any particular crash, no one can say whetherair an bag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. Inflation is determinedby the angleof the impact and Don’t put anything on,or attach anything to, the the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only one steering wheel or instrument panel. Also, don’t indication of this. put anything (suchas pets or objects) between What makesan air bag inflate? any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. If somethingis between an In a frontal or near-frontal impactof sufficient severity, occupant and an air bag, it could affect the the air bag sensing system’detects that the vehicleis performance of the air bag or worse, it could suddenly stopping asa result of a crash. The sensing -- system triggers a chemical reactionof the sodium azide cause injury. sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen gas, which inflates theair bag. The inflator,air bag and When should an air bag inflate? related hardware areall part of the air bag modules The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe packed inside the steering wheel and in the instrument frontal or near-frontal crashes, The air bagwill inflate panel in front of the right front passenger. only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level.”If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.If your vehicle strikes something tha$will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold levelwill be higher. The air bagis not designed to inflatein rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflationwould not

~. , I -i<,.y*< , . ,I ,, >.-,-?. , i-. a-7 helpoccupant.the ..~.-. , 3, . -’, . .sa.-. . ’ :, <.;: .:,, 44,.?>z?.;,c ”.;) ’ -.‘i - .! .- ,’ ...... >.*. .. . b, .,,- , .J :!-.“ -’ r,’ -” .’ . :<:!-:- ,:. ,.; , . :;. . , ., . “2- ’. ’ - 5 ,%,-,-:..;, .*.., “,;L :..~~~.~.~.~!,~~~~~~-..>’,..,’<.. ,.. . ,, : .. . , , ’. . .‘ .’/ L-i9 How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe fiontd or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. The air bag supplements the protection When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the forceof This dust could cause breathing problems for the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body, people with a historyof asthma or other stopping the occupant more gradually. Butair bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyonein the rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. an occupant's motion is not toward theair bag. Air bags If you have breathing problems but can't get out should never be regardedas anythng more than a of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to fresh air by opening a window or door. severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. What will you see after an air b& inffates? In many crashes severe enoughto inflate an air bag, After the air bag Mates, it quickly deflates. This occurs windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. so quickly thatsome people may not even realizethe air Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the bag inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module in right front passenger airbag. . the steering wheel hub for the driver's air bag, or the . The air bags are designed to inflate only once. After .instrument panel for the right front passenger'sbag, will they inflate, you'll need somenew parts for your air be hot for a short time. Thepart of the bag that comes bag system.If you don't get them, the air bag system into contact withyou may be warm,but it will nev'er be won't be there to help protect youin another crash. too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust A new system will includeair bag modulesand coming from vents in the deflatedair bags. Air bag possibly otherparts. the^ service manual for your inflation will not prevent the driver from seeingor from vehicle covers the needto replace other parts. being able to steer the vehicle, norwill it stop people from leaving the vehicle. 1-20 .-_.I ,. .' 0 Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system.The module records information Air bags affect how your Pontiac should be serviced. about the readinessof the system, when the sensors There are partsof the air bag system in several places are activated and driver’s safety belt usage at around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to deployment. inflate while someoneis working on your vehicle.Your Pontiac dealer and the Bonneville Service Manual have Let only qualified technicians workon your air bag information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. Improper service can mean that yourair bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Serviceand system won’t work properly. See your dealer for Owner Publications”in the Index. service.

NOTICE:

If you damage thecover for thedriver’s or the For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is right frontpassenger’s air bag, they may not turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air work properly. You may have to replace the air bag canstill. inflate during improperservice. You bag module in the steeringwheel or both theair can be injured if you are close to an air bag when bag module and the instrument panel for the it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped withyellow tape right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not open or or yellow connectors. They are probably part of break the air bagcovers. the airbag system. Be sure to‘follow proper service procedures,’and make sure theperson performing work foryou is qualified to doso.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy A pregnant woman,should wear a lap-shoulder belt,and the lap portion should be wornas low as possible, below Safety beltswork for everyone, including pregnant the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. women. Like all occupants, they are more likelybe to seriously injuredif they don’t we& safety b’elts. The best way to protect thefetus is to protect the mother. When a safety beltis worn properly, it’smore likely that the fetus won’tbe hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, asfor anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt.See “Driver Position,” earlier in this section. When the lap portionof the belt is pulled outall the way, it will lock. If it does,let it go back all the way and start again.

If YOU vehicle has a center passenger position,be sure to use the correct buckle when bucklingyour lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,see if you are using the buckle for the center passenger position. Center Passenger Position

Lap Belt If your vehicle has frontand rear bench seats, someone can sit in the center positions.

When you sitin a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plateand pull it along the belt. Rear Seat Passengers It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! ‘Accident statisticsshow that ‘anbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more oftenin .crashes thanthose who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengerswho aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash.And they can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown’until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and releaseit the same way as the lap Lap-Shoulder Belt part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the beltisn’t longenough, see ‘“Safety Belt Extender” at the knd of this section. The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,ti1.t the Don’t let it get twisted. latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckleit. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.

1-25 3. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle I I I I I I I I I I I end of the belt as you pull onup the shoulder part. The lap part of the belt shodbe worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force tothe strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to ‘slide underthe lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause seriousor even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest.These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash. 1-26 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guidesfor I A CAUTION: Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown too loose. In a crash,you would move forward child restraints andfor small adults. When installedon a too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt,the comfort guide pulls the belt away shlder belt should fit against your body. from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger positionin the rear seat.To provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults,the comfort guidesmay be installedon the shoulder belts. Here’s how to installa comfort guide and use the safety belt:

To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle. 1-27 1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edgeof 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. .The elastic the seatback and the interior body to remove the cord must be under the belt.Then, place the guide guide from its storage clip. over the belt,and insert the two edgesof the beltinto the slotsof the guide.

1-28 3. Be sure thatthe belt is not twistedand it lies flat. 4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” on top. earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

1-29 To remove and store the comfort guides,just perform Smaller Children-and Babies these steps in reverse order. Squeezethe belt edges together so that.you can take themout from the guides. Full the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and CAUTION:' then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and A clip inwardid in between the seatbackand the interior body, leaving only the loopof elastic cord exposed. Smaller children and babies should alwaysbe restrained ina child or infant restraint. The Children instructions for the restraintwill, say whether it is Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes the right type andsize for yourchild. A very infants and all children smaller than adultsize. In fact, young child's hip bones are so small thata the law in every state in the United Statesand in every regular belt might not stay low om the hips, as it Canadian province says childrenup to some agemust be should. Instead, the beltwill likely be over the restrained whilein a vehicle. child's abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force righton the child's abdomen, whichcould cause serious or fatal injuries.So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

1-30 CAUTION: (Contidued)

at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold. Secure the babyin an infantrestraint.

A CAUTION:

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a crash. Duringa crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash CAUTION: (Continued)

1-31 Child Restraints

Be sure the child restraint is designed to be useda in ~ A CAUTION: vehicle. If it is,it will have a label saying thatit meets Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standards. A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint.You may seriously injured if the right front passenger'sair find these instructionson the restraint itselfor in a bag inflates. This is because the back of a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt systemin sear-facing child restraint would be very close to

your vehicle, but the child also hasbe to secured within ~ the inflatingair bag. Always secure a rear-facing the restraintto help reduce the chanceof personal injury. child restraint in therear seat. The instructions that come with the infant or child You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint willshow you how to dothat. restraint in the right front seat. Before you secure Where to Put the Restraint a forward-facing child restraint, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. Or, Accident statistics)show that chiIdren are saferif they secure thechild restraint in the rear seat. are restrainedin the rear ratherthan the front seat.We at General Motors therefore recommend thatyou put your child restraintin the rear seat.Never put a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger seat. Here's why:

1-32 A Top Strap I A CAUTION: A child in a child.restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured by the right frpntpassenger air bag if it inflates. Never secure achild restraint in the center frontseat. It's always better to secure a child restraint in the rearseat. You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger seat, but only with the seat moved all the way back.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure thec,Md restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure- any child restraint in your vehicle-- even when no childis in it. If your child restraint has a top strap,it should be anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed,you can ask your-Pontiac dealerto put it in for you. H.iou want to installan anchor yourself, your dealer cantell you how to doit. For cars first soldin Canada, child restraintswith a top You'll be using the lap-shoulder b'elt. See the earlier part strap must be anchored accordingto Canadian law. about the top strapif the child restraint has one. Yam de&r can obtain the hardware kit and instdl it for 1. Put the restraint on the seat Follow theiilstmctions you, or you may install it yourself using thehtnxctioqs for the child restraint. provided in thekit. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint asthe Use the tether hardware kit availablefrom the dealer. instructions say. The hardware and installation instructions were 3. Pick up the latch plate, and the lap and shoulder specifically designed for this vehicle. run portions of the vehicle's safety belt through QT Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear around the restraint. The child restraint instructions Outside Seat Position will show you how.

n

u 4. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the beltif needed. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. neck, putit behind the child restraint. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position

You’ll beusing the lap belt.

bA CAUTION: I A child in a child restraint in the center front seat 6. To tighten the belt,pull up on the shoulder belt while can be badly injured by the right frontpassenger you push down on the child restraint. air bag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat.It’s always better to 7. Push and pull the child restraintin different secure a child restraint in the rearseat. You may, directions to be sure it issecure. however, secure a forward-facingchild restraint To remove thechild restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s in the sight frontpassenger seat, but only with safety beltand let it go back all the way. The safety belt the seatmoved all the way back. will move freely again andbe ready to work foran adult or larger child passenger. See the earlier part about the top strapif the child restraint has one. 1-36 1. Make the beltas long as possibleby tilting the latch S. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis plate and pulling it along the belt. positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 5. To tighten the belt, pullits free end while you push down on the child restraint. 3. Secure the childin the child restraint as the 1. Push and pull the child restraintin different instructions say. directions to be sure it is secure. If it isn't, secure the 4. Run the vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint ina different place in the vehicle and restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show contact the child restraint maker for their advice you how. about how to attach the child restraint properly. 1-37 To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part safety belt.It will be ready to work foran adult or larger about thetop strap if the child restraint has one. child passenger. 1. Because your vehicle hasa right front passengerair Securingta Child Restraint in the Right bag, always move the seat asfar back as it will go Front Seat Position before securing a forward-facingchild restraint. (See “Seats” in the Index.) 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the imtructipns say. 4. Pick up the latch plate,and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safetybelt through or Your vehicle has a right front passengerair bag. Never around the restraint. The child restraint instructions put a.rear-facing child restraintin this seat, Here’s why: will show you how. If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very clos’e to the inflating air bag. Always ‘secure a rear-facing child restraintin the rear seat.

1 ?Q 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis 6. Pull the rest of the lap beltall the way out ofthe positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the retractor to set the lock. safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-39 Larger Children

7. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. Children who have outgrown child restraints should 8. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions tobe sure itis secure. wear the vehicle’s safety b’elts. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s If you have the choice, a child shouldsit next to a safety beltand let itgo back all the way. The safety belt window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and will move freely again andbe ready to work for an adult get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide. larger child passenger. child or larger I

1-40 Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. Children who aren’t buckled up canbe thrown out in Never do this. a crash. Here two children are wearing thesame belt. The 0 Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other belt can’t properly spread theimpact forces. In a people who are. crash, thetwo children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

@ What if,achild is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the centerof the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide.If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides”in the Index. If the childis so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in the center seat position, the one that has onlya lap belt.

1-41 , I I Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seatthat has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder partis behind the child. If the child wears thebelt in thisway, in a crash thechild might sli’deunder thebelt. The belt’s force would then be applied righton the child’s abdomen. That could cause ‘seriousor fatal injuria

Wherever the child sits,the lap portion of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’sthighs. This applies belt force to the child’s

pelvic bones in a crash. I Safety Belt Extender Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you After a Crash should use it. If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? But if a safety belt isn’t long enoughfasten, to your After avery minor collision, nothingmay be necessary. dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go But if the belts were stretched, as they wouldif wornbe in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the during a more severe crash, then you neednew belts. extender will be long enough for you.The extender will be just for you, and justfor the seat in your vehicle that If b’elts are cutor damaged, replace them. Collision you choose. Don’t let someone else useit, and use it damage also may mean youwill need to have safety belt only for the seatit is madeto fit. To wear it,just attach it or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts andrepairs to the regular safety belt. may be necessary evenif the belt wasn’t being used at the timeof the collision. Checking Your Restraint Systems If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the special Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light part of the safety belt that goesthrough the seatto the and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and adjuster mayneed,to be replaced. anchorages are working properly. Lookfor any other If an bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see air system parts,See the parton the bag system earlier anything that might keepa safety belt system from air in this section. doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed safetybelts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is tom or frayed, get a newone right away. Also look for any openedOF broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (Theair bag system doesnot need regular maintenance.) i NOTES Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your Pontiac, and information on starting, shiftingand braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell if you everything is working properly-- and what todo if you have a problem. Keys

A CAUTION:- Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windowsor other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys ina vehicle with young children.

2-1 The ignition keys are for the When a new Bonneville is delivered, the dealer removes ignition only. the plugsfrom the keys,and gives them to the fist owner. However,the ignition key may not havea plug. If the ignition key doesn’t have a plug, it have will a bar-coded key tag. Each plug or tag has a codeon it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmithhow to make extra keys. Keep the plugs or the tagsin a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made easilyusing these plugs or the tag. If you need a new key, contact your Pontiac dealer who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the The dam keys are for the pre-cut emergency keywhich Pontiac sends after doors and all other locks. delivery. In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1-800-ROADSIDE or 1-800-762-3743.

NOTICE:

I Your Pontiac has a numberof features that can help prevent theft. But youcan have a lot of trouble getting intoyour vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You mayeven have to damage your vehicle to get in.So be sure you have extra keys.

2-2 Door Locks From the outside, use your door keyor Remote Keyless Entry transmitter, if your vehicle has this option. With your door key, turning the key towardthe rear of the I vehicle will lock the door and turningthe key toward the front of the vehiclewill unlock it. If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent systemand it Unlocked doors canbe dangerous. is activated, unlock the doors only with the key or Passengers -- especially children -- can easily Remote KeylessEntry system. This will avoid open the doorsand fall out. When a door is setting off the alarm. locked, the inside handle won’t open it. Outsiders caneasily enter through an unlocked From the inside, to lock the door when you slowdown or stop your’vehicle. door, slide the locking lever rearward. TQ unlock the This may not be so obvious: You increase the door, slidq the locking chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a lever forward. crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will befar better off whenever you drive your ,vehicle.

There are severalways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

2-3 Power Door Locks Programmable Automatic Door Locks (Option) Close your doors andturn on the ignition. Every time you move your shift leverout of PARK (P) all of the doors willlock. And, every time you stopand move your shift lever intoPARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF, your doors will unlock.If someone needs to get out while you’re notin PARK (P), have that person use the manual or power lock. Whenthe door is closed again, it will not lock automatically. Just use the m’anual or power lock to lock the door again. Overriding Lock Delay If you need to lock your doors before shifting outof PARK (P),just use the manualor power lock button to lock the doors. With power doorlocks, you can lock or unlockall the doors of your vehicle using the driver’sor front passenger’s door lock switch. The switch on each rear door works only that door’s lock. It won’t lock(or unlock) all of the doors -- that’s a safety feature.

2-4 Customizing Your Automatic Door Locks Feature 3. Press the LOCK buttonon the RemoteKeyless Entry transmitter. The automatic door lockswill remain in With Remote Keyless Entry, you can program the: the current mode. automatic door locks feature to change to the following modes: 4. Press the LOCK button on the transmitter again. Each time the transmitter’s LOCK buttonis pressed, Mode Operation the mode will advance by one,going from 3 to 1 to 1 No automatic door lock or unlock. 2, etc. 2 All doors automatically lock when 5. Release the power door lock switch. The automatic shifted outof PARK (P). No door locks will remainin the most recent mode automatic door unlock. selected. 3 All doors automatically lock when If your vehicleis not equipped with Remote Keyless shifted outof PARK (P). All the Entry, use the following procedure to change modes: doors automatically unlock when 1. Close all doors andturn the ignition on.Keep all shifted intoPARK (P) with the doors closed throughout this procedure. ignition turnedOFF. 2. Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode3. through Step 3. If your vehicleis equipped with Remote Keyless Entry, 3. Cycle the PARK (P) shift lever startingin PARK (P) use the following procedure to change modes: position to advanceby one mode. 1. Close all doors andturn the ignition on. Keep all 4. Release the power door lock switch. doors closed throughout this procedure. 2. Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch through Step 4. Rear Door Security Lock If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adultsor older children who ride in the rear won’t be ableto open Your Bonneville is equipped the rear doorfrom the inside.You should let adults and with rear door security older childrenknow how these security locks work,and locks that help prevent how to cancel the locks. passengers from ,opening To cancel the rear door lock: the rear doorsof your car from the inside.To use one 1. Unlock the doorfiom the inside and openthe door of these locks: from the outside. 2. Move the lever all the way down. 3. Do the same for the other rear d’oor. The rear door lockswill now work normally. c Anti-Lockout Feature 1. Move the leverall the way up,to the ENGAGED The power door locks will not work if the key is leftin the position. imsm with the driver’s door open.You can override this

3 2. Close the door. feature by holding the power door lock switch for more 3. Do the same thing tothe other rear door lock. than three seconds, unless the engineis running. The rear doors of your vehicle canhot be ’openedfkom Leavhg Yuur Vehicle inside when this feature is in use.If you want to opena If you are leaving the vehicle, takeyour keys, openyour rear door whenthe security lockis on: door and setthe locks from inside. Then get out and 1. Unlock the door fkom the hide. close the door. 2. Then open the door from the outside. If your vehicle hasa theft-deterrent system, see “Universal Theft-Deterrent” in the Index. 2-6 Remote Keyless Entry (Option) Should interference to this system occur,try this: If your Pontiac has this option, you lockcan and unlock 0 Check to determineif battery replacementis necessary. your doors or unlock your trunk from up30 tofeet (9 m) See the instructions on battery replacement. away using the key chain transmitter supplied with 0 Check the distance.You may be too far from your your vehicle. vehicle. This product has a maximum range. Your Remote Keyless 0 Check the location. Other vehiclesdr objects may be Entry System operates blocking the signal. on a radio frequency 0 See your Pontiac dealeror a qualified technician subject to Federal for service. Comrinunications Commission (FCC) Changes or modificationsto this systemby other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment. Operation The driver’s door will unlock when UNLOCKis pressed. This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. If UNLOCK is pressed again withinfive seconds, all Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: doors will unlock. Pressingthe UNLOCK button will (1) This device may not cause hannful interference, and also illuminatethe interior lamps. See “Illuminated (2)This device must accept any interference received, Entry” in the index. including interference that may cause undesired operation. All doorswill lock when LOCK is pressed. The trunk will unlock when the openedtrunk symbol is pressed whenthe ignition is OFF. The trunk symbol will also work when the ignition on,is but ody while in PARK (P). Panic Mode Key Transmitter Response When the button with the horn symbol the on key This provides feedback to the driver when the vehicle transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the receives a commandfrom the key transmitter.The headlamps and taillamps will flash forup to two following modes may be selected: minutes. This can be turnedoff by pressing the panic button again, unlocking the vehicle with a key or by ModeTransmitter Response turning the ignition toon. 0 No transmitterresponse when If only the panic button works, the transmitter needs to locking or unlocking vehicle 'be resynchronized to the receiver,Do this by pressing 1 No transmitterresponse when and holding both theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons locking;exterior lamps flash when ' for about eight seconds; you must be within rangeof unlocking vehicle the vehicle. 2 Exteriorlamps flash.when When the system has been resynchronized, the horn will locking; no transmitter response chirp and the exterior lampswill flash once. The system when unlocking vehicle should now operate properly. 3 Exteriorlamps flash when locking Personalization Features and when unlo8cking vehicle Each key transmitter can be programmed to the driver's 4 Exteriorlamps flash and horn preference for programmable automatic door locksOF chirps when locking; no key transmitter response.See each featurein the Index. transmitter responsqwb,

unlockingvehicle '';{ '8' .. '- . . 5 Exteriorlamps flash and horn chirps when locking; exterior lamps flash whenunlocking

2-8 Vehicles are delivered programmedin Mode 5. To The delayed locking featurecan be turned on.or off for change to another mode: each remote transmitter. 1. Press and hold the power door lock switch. To turn the feature on: 2. Press the openedtrunk button on the transmitter.The 1. Press and hold the power door lock switch transmitter will remainin its current mode. throughout this procedure. All'the doors will Io&. 3. Press the openedtrunk button again. Each timethe 2. Press the UNLOCK button on the remote opened trunk button is pressed, the transmitter will transmitter. The lock delay is stilloff and all advance tothe next mode. doors willremain locked. 4. Release the power door lock switch. 3. Press the UNLOCK button on the remote Delayed Locking (Option) transmitter again. Lock delayis now active and all doors dill unlock. NOTE: This feature is available onlyif you request your dealer to activate this option. After initial activation 4. Releasethe power door lock switch. I you can turn this feature on and off by using the If your vehicle is not equipped with the Remote Keyless following procedure. Enby, use the following procedure turnto the feature on: This feature letsthe driver delay the actual lockingof 1. With the ignitionon, press and holdthe power door the vehicle. When the power door lock switch is pressed lock switch.All doors will lock. with the key removed from the ignition and the driver's door open, a chime will sound three times to signal that2. Toggle the headlamps switch seven times(off to on the delayed locking systemis active. When all doors is one toggle). The doors will unlock to confirm that have been closed, the doors will lock automatically after the featureis now on. five seconds.If any dooris opened before this, the five-second twer will reset itself onceall the doors 3. Release the power doorlock switch. have been closed again. To turn the featureoff, repeat the previous procedure. Pressing the door lock switch twice within two seconds will overridethis feature. Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle Each key chain transmitteris coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased through your dealer. Rememberto bring any remaining transmitters with you whenyou go to your dealer. When the dealer matchesthe replacement transmitterto your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched toit. See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle. Battery Replacement For battery replacement,use one Duracella battery, type Under normal use, the batteryin your key chain DL-2032, or a similar type. transmitter should lastabout two years. You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitterwon’t work at thenormal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.

2-10 To replace the battery: Trunk 1. Insert a coin into the notch near the keyring. Turnthe coin counterclockwise to separate the two halvesof Trunk Lock Release the transmitter. To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the door key 2. Once the transmitteris separated, use a pencil to and turn it. remove the old battery.Do not use a metal object. Remote Trunk Release (Option) 3. Remove and replace the battery. Replaceit as the instructions inside the cover indicate. If you have this option, press the trunk release Be.sure not to touch anyof the black boxes or the button located below the green surfaces. Any static transferredfrom your driver’s door armrest to body to these areas may cause the transmitter to release thetrunk lid. be inoperative. I -. ’ .’- 4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure no moisture can enter. 5. Resynchronize the transmitter by pressing and holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for about eight seconds. You must be within range of the vehicle. When the transmitter has been resynchronized, the The ignitionmay be on orOFF and the transaxle must horn will clwp and the exterior lamps willflash once. be in PARK (P). The system also works with the Remote Keyless Entry system. Remote Trunk Release Lockout (Option) Trunk Lid The trunk release lockout valet switchin the trunk allows you to secure itemsin the trunk. By pressing the left sideof the valet switch,the remote trunk release button below the driver’s door armrest will be disabled. Push the right sideof the valet switch to enable the It can be dangerous to drive with the trunklid remote trunk release button towork again. open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle, You can’t see or smell -, Trunk SecurityOverride (Option) CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death, ‘: .’ Psessing the trunk symbol on the remote trms~xktter If you must drive with the trunklid open or if ,. . opens the trunk even if the remote trunk release lockout switch is activated. electrical wiring or other cabl’econnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:’ Make sureall windows are shut. 0 Thrn the fanon your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on ECON or VENT. That will force outside air into yourvehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in theIndex. If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all theway. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. Theft Parking at Night Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities. Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lockyour Although your Pontiac has a number of theft-deterrent vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables ofout sight. features, weknow that nothing we put onit can make Put themin a storage area,or take them with you. it impossible to steal. However, there are waysyou can help. Parking Lots If you parkin a lot where someone will be watching Key in,the Ignition your vehicle, it’s best to lockit up and take your keys. If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an But what if you have to leave your ignition key? Whatif easy target forjoy riders or professional thieves-- so you have to leave something valuablein your vehicle? don’t do it. Put your valuablesin a storage area, like yourtrunk With the ignition OFF and the driver’s door open, you’ll or glove box. hear a tone reminding you to remove yourkey from the 0 Lock the glove box. ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, andso will your ignition 0, Lock all @e doors except the driver’s. and transaxle. And remember to lock thedoors. 0 Then take the door key with you.

’1 12 Universal Theft-Deterrent (Option) Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if you lock the doors witha key or manual door lock.It If your Pontiac has this option, it hasa theft-deterrent activates only if you use a powerdoor lock switch ox almsystem. Withthis system, theSECURITY light Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. will flash as you open the door (if your ignitionis OFF). This light remindsyou to activate the theft-deterrent Avoid settingbff the alarm by accident. system when leavingyour vehicle. Always unlock a door with a key, or use the Remote Activating thesys tern: Keyless Entry transmitter. Unlocking door a any other way will set off the alarm. 1. Open the door. Stopping thealarm: If you set off the alarm by accident, 2. Lock the door withthe power door lock switch or unlock any door with your key.You can alsoturn off the Remote KeylessEntry transmitter. TheSEC-Y alarm by pressing theUNLOCK button on the Remote light should come on and stay on. Keyless Entry transmitter. The alarm won’t stopif you 3. Close all doors. TheSECUFUTY light should goafT after try to docka door any other way. about 30 seconds and the system will then be armed. Testing the alarm: Open the, window, then follow the If the SECURITY light comes on forone minute and directions for activating the system described earlier. then shutsoff while the ignition is on, the security Once the alarm is set, reach through the window and system has detecteda problem with itself. See your manually uvlock the doorfrom the insideor turn on the dealer for service. ignition. The alarm should sound. If a door ‘or the trunk is opened without the key or If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to see if Remote Keyless Entry transmitter, thealarm will go off. the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown.To replace It willalso go off if the trunk lock is damaged. Your the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index. vehicle’s lampswill flash and the horn will sound for To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate the three minutes, then willgo off to save batterypower. theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle. PASS-Key@I1 time, the vehiclewill not start. This discourages someone fiom randomly trying different keys with different resistor Your vehicle is equipped pellets in an attempt to makea match. with the PASS-Key II The ignition key, must be clean and dry before it’s (Personalized Automotive inserted in the ignitionor the engine may not start.If the Security System) engine does not start andthe SECURITY lightis on, the theft-deterrent system. key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignitionoff. PASS-Key II is a passive theft-deterrent system. Ciean and drythe key. Wait about three minutes andtry It works when youinsert again. The SECURITYlight may remain on duringthis or remove the key from time. If the starter stillwon’t work, and the key appears the ignition. to be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also wantto check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your PASS-Key II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key vehicle needs service.If your vehicle does start, the first that matches a decoderin your vehicle. ignition key may be faulty.See your Pontiac dealeror a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key Q. When the PASS-Key11 system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shutsdown the vehicle’s starter and If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starter won’t missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t workand the work and fuel won’t go tothe engine. Lf someone tries to SECURITY light will flash. But you don’t have to wait start your vehicle again or uses another key duringthis three minutes before trying another ignition key.

! 2-15 See your Pontiac dealer or a locksmith who can service New Vehicle (LBreak-In99 the PASS-Key IT to have a new key made. If you’re ever driving-and the SECURITY light comes on and remains on,you will beable.to restart your NOTICE: engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key 11 system, P however, is not working properly andmust be serviced Your modern Pontiacdoesn’t need an elaborate by your Pontiac dealer.Your vehicle is not protected by “break=in?’.Butit win perform betterin the long . the PASS-Key II system. run if you follow these guidelines: If you lose or damage PASS-Key a II ignition key, see Dm’t drive at any one speed. -- fast or your Pontiac dealerOT a locksmith who can service slow -- for the first500 miles (804 km). PASS-Key 11 to have anew key made. In an emergency, Don’t make full-throttle starts. call the Pontiac Roadside Assistance Programat Avoid making hard.stops for thefirst 1-800-ROADSID3, or 1-800-762-3743. 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in- guideline every time youmget new brake linings. Don’t tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See ‘cTowinga flrailer” in the Indexfor more information.

2-16 Ignition Switch LOCK (B): The only positionin which you can remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition and transaxle. C OFF (C): Unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and transaxle, butdoes not send electrical power to any accessories. Use this positionif yoUr vehicle mustbe pushed or towed, but nevertry to push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will soundif you openthe,. driver's door when the ignitionis OFF and the keyis in the ignition. RUN (D):An on position to which the switch returns after you start your engineand release the switch. The switch staysin the 'RUN position when the engine is running. But even when the engineis not running, you can useRUN to operate your electrical power accessories, and to display some instrument panel With the ignition keyin the ignition switch,you can turn warning lights. the switch tofive positions. ACCESSORY (A): An on position in which you can operate your electrical power accessories. Pressin the ignition switchas you turn the top of it toward you.

2-17 START (E): Starts the engine. When the enginest&& Retained Accessory, Power (Option) release the key.The ignition switchwill return toRUN for normal driving. If you have this option, after youturn your ignitionOFF and even remove the key, you will still have electrical Note that even if the engineis not running, the positions power to such accessoriesas the radio and power ACCESSORY and RUN are on positions that allow you windows for up to10 minutes. Butif you open adoor, to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio. power is turned off. Key Reminder Warning Starting Your ,Engine If you leave your keyin the ignition,in the OFF Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). position, you will hear a warning tone when you open Your engine won’tstart in any other position-- that’s the driver’s door. a safety feature.To restart when you’re already ‘moving, use NEUTRAL (N)only. NOTICE: NOTICE: If your key seem stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure it is all the way in. If it is, then Don’t try toshift to PARK (P) if y& Ponthc is turn thesteering wheel left and rightwhile you moving. If you do, you could damage the turn thekey hard. But turn thekey only with transaxle. Shiftto PARK (P) only when your your hand. Using a tool to force itcould break vehicle is stopped. the key or theignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

2-18 Starting Your 3.8 Liter Engine floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal,turn your briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let this time keep the pedal down for fivesix or seconds. go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. engine gets warm. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat thenomd . starting procedure. NOTICE: NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than I 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe Your engine is designed to workwith the drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can electronics in your y,ehicle. If you add electrical damage your starter motor. parts oraccessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Before adding electrical 2. I€ it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, START for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine might not perform properly. your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between If you ever have tohave your vehicle towed, see each try to help avoid draining your battery. the partof this manualthat tells how to do it 3. If your engine still won’tstart (or starts but then without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Your Vehicle” m the Index. Try pushing your accelerator pedalall the way tothe Engine CoolantKeater (Option) A.CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord intoa properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won't reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. ,

4. After you've used the coolant heater?be sure to store the cord as it was before to keep it away fiom moving engine parts. If you don't, it couldbe damaged. In very cold weather,0" F (- 18O C) or colder, the engine coolant heatercan help. You'll get easier startingand How long shouldYQU keep the coolant heater plugged better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the the coolant heater shouldbe plugged in a minimumof kind of oil you have, and some otherthings. Instead of four hours priorto starting you vehicle. trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your Pontkc dealer in the area where you'llbe parking To use the coolant heater: your vehicle. The dealer can giveyou the best advicefor

'' 1. Turn off the engine. that particular mea. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet. Automatic Transaxle Operation Your automatic transaxle may have a shift lever located on the console between the seatsor on the steering column. It is dangerous toget out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P).with the parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in There are several different positions foryour shift lever. the Index. PARK (P): This locks yourfront wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.

2-21 Ensure the shft lever is fullyin PARK (P) range before To rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, starting the engine.Your Pontiac has a brake-transaxle ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see shift interlock.You have to fully apply your regular “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. brakes you can shift from when the before PARK (P) NEUTRAL (N): In this position,your engine doesn’t ignition key is in the on position. you cannot shift out If connect withthe wheels. To restart when you’re of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) and also release the (N) when your vehicle is being towed. shift lever button on floor shift console models asyou NEUTRAL maintain brake application. Then move theshift lever into the gearyou wish. (Press theshift lever button before moving the shift lever on floor shift console models.) See A CAUTION: “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” later in this section. REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the NOTICE: brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople Shifting to REVERSE (R)while your vehicle is or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or moving forward could damage your transaxle. NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is racing. Shift to REVERSE(R) only after your vehicle is stopped.

2-22 NOTICE: NOTICE:

Damage to your transaxlecaused by shifting out If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly, or of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine if it seems not to shift gears asyou go faster, racing isn’t covered by your warranty. something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very far thatway, your vehicle can bedamaged. So, if this happens, have AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.If you need more powerfor passing, your,vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you and you’re: can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (56 kdh) and AUTOMATIC - Going less than about35 mph (56 km/h), push your OVERDRIVE for higher speeds. accelerator pedal about halfway down. (0) - Going about 35 mph (56 h/h)or more, push the accelerator all the way down. DRIVE (D): This positionis also used for normal driving, however, it offers more powerand lower fuel You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.economy than AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (@). Here are some times you might chooseDRIVE (D) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@): - When driving on hilly, winding roads - When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears - When going down a steephill SECOND (2): This position givesyou more power but %IRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2)-onhills. lower he1 economy) than SECOND (2).You can use it on It can help control your speedas you go down steep very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the selector mountain roads, but then you would also wantto use lever is put in FIRST (l)?the transaxle won't shift into your brakes off and on. first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

~~ ~~

~~~~ ~~ ~ NOTICE: NOTICE:

~~ ~ ~~~ Don't drive in SEC.OND (2) for morethan If your front wheels can't rotate,don't- try to 5 miles (8 km), or at speeds over 55 mph drive. This might happen if you were stuckin (88 kdh), or you can damage your transaxle. very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0)or object. You could damage your transaxle. DRIVE (D) as much as possible. Also, if you stop when goinguphill, don't hold Don't shift intoSECOND (2) unless you are going your vehicle there withonly the accelerator slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), dr you can pedal. .This could overheat and damage the damage yourengine. transaxle. Use your brakes orshift intoPARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

2-24 Performance Shifting (Option) Computer Command Ride (Option) Vehicles equipped with computer command ride provide improved passenger ridecomfort under a variety of road and driving conditions. For normal driving conditions, press theTOURING RIDE button to get a more refined comfortable ride. When driving conditions require improved handling, press the PERFORMRIDE button to geta firm ride. This mode minimizes how much the passenger compartment leans inturns, and decreases the up-and-down motion of the frontand rear of the vehicle during acceleration or braking. Note that evenin the TOURING RIDE mode, the system will adjust to rapid cornering, acceleration or braking. Press PERFORM SHIFT to allow the transaxle to shift If the computer command ride detectsa problem in the at higher engine speeds, increasing acceleration system, the lights on the TOURINGRIDE and performance. An indicator light on the switch willglow PERFORM RIDE buttons will both come on.If this when performance shifting isin operation. happens, have your vehicle serviced. Downshifts will occur at a lower percentage of accelerator application while you'rein the PERFORMSHIFI' mode. Press NORMAL SHIFT to have the transaxleshift at lower engine speeds, increasing fuel economy.An I indicator light on the switchwill glow when normal shifting is in operation. 2-25 Parking Brake pedal down withyour right foot and push theparking brake pedal with your left foot.This will unlockthe To set the parking brake, pedal. When youlift your left foot, the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal pedal willfollow it to the release position. down- withyour right foot. If you try to drive away with theparlung brake on, the Push down theparking brake light stayson and a chime sounds untilyou release brake pedal with your left . the parking brake or recycle^ the ignition. foot. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning light will come onand a NOTICE: single chime will be heard. Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat.You may have to replace them, and you could also damageother If you start to drive away with the parking brake set,a parts of your vehicle. chime will sound after the vehicle has traveled 46 feet (14 m). IIf you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, To release theparking brake, usethe PUSH TO see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.That section shows RELEASE parking brake pedal. Hold the regular brake what to do first to keep the trailerfrom moving.

2-26 Shifting Into PARK (P) Steering Column Shift Lever I 1. Hold the brake pedal down withyour right foot and set the parking brake.

It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in theIndex.

2. Move the shift leverinto PARK (P) position like this: Pdl the lever towardyou. I Console Shift Lever

0 Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. Move the ignition keyto LOCK. 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand 4. Remove the keyand take it with you. If you can set theparking brake. leave'your vehicle with the ignition keyin your 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this: hand, your vehicleis in (P). PARK Hold in the button on the lever. Push the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle. 3. Move the ignition key toLOCK. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave you vehicle with the ignition keyin your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-28 . . Leaving Your Vehicle With the Torque Lock Engine Running If you are parkingon a hill and you don’tshift your transaxle intoBARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To c-1 It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the prevent torque lock, setthe parking brake and thenshift into PARK properly before you leave the driver’s engine running.Your vehicle couldmove (P) seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in I suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) the Index. with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehiclewith the engine running, itcould When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever of out overheat and even catch fire.You or others could PARK (P) before you release’the parking brake. be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the If torque lock does dccur, you may need to have another engine running unlessyou have to. vehicle pushyours a little uphill totake some of the I I pressure fromthe transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). If you have to leave your vehiclewith the engine running, be sure your vehicleis in PARK (P) and your parking brakeis firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve movedthe shift lever into thePARK (P) position, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move theshift lever away from PARK (P) without first pullingit toward you (or, if you havethe console shift lever, without first pushing the button).If you can,it means that theshift lever wasn’t fully locked

into PARK (P). ., .. ,. . -i . . , , , , ,, ;...... , :.. *. -1. .?..?e,:,a ”g; .--_- , ,.i._.., .. . .-. -. .-:e ?, ’ . ’ -r. -(.. .. , ‘ .. , . . , . .I . ’ !- , ,/ . ,, , ’.* . .. ,. .. 1 ,.x- I,’ _. *, I$ ’ I , ’. ..,. , -;-:;: i ,-.2- :-.. <

~ 2-29 Shifting Out of PARK (P) Parking Over Things That Burn Your Pontiac has a brake-transaxle shift interlock.You have to fully apply your regular brakebefore you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in theRUN position. See “Automatic Transaxle”in the Index. If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever-- push the shift lever all waythe into PARK (I?) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gearyou want. ‘If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’tshift out of PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the key OFF. Open and close the driver’sdoor to turn off the Retained Accessory Power feature,if you have it. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want. 5. Have the vehicle fiied as soon as you can. Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’tpark over papers, leaves, dry grassor other things that can,burn.

2-30 Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While E You’re Parked It’s better not topark with the engine running. Butif you ever have to, hereare some things toknow. Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas - carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or CAUTION:, smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. A You might have exhaust coming in if: Idling theengine with the air system control off Your exhaust system sounds strange could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle or different. (see the eqrlier Cautionunder “Engine Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. Exhaust”). 0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly Your vehicle was damaged when driving over carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle evenif high pointson the road or over road debris. the fanswitch is at the highest setting. One place Repairs weren’t done correctly. this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with Your vehicle or exhaust system had been CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park ina modified improperly. garage with the engine running. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. your vehicle: (See “Blizzard” in the Index.) Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out anyCO; and Have your vehicle fixedimmediately.

2-31 Windows Power Windows It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even whenyou’re an fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the propersteps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” in the Index. If you are parkingon a hill and if you’re pulling a Switches on the driver’s door panel control eachof the trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. windows when the ignitionis on or when Retained Accessory Power is active. In addition, each passenger door has a control switchfor its own window. Express-Down Window Tilt Wheel When the driver's window switch is held rearward for more than a half second, the windowwill lower completely. The window can be qpenedin smaller amounts by pressing the switch rearwardand releasing it immediately. To stop the window while itis lowering, press the switch again, then release.To raise the window, hold the switch forward. Horn You can sound the horn by pressing anywhere on the pads with the horn symbolson your steering wheel.

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheeland pull the lever. Move the steering wheel toa comfortable level, then release the leverto lock the wheel in place. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward (for right)and two downward (for left) positions.These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a tum, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the leverwill return automatically. An mow on the instrument panel will flashin the direction of the turn or lane change.

The lever on the left sideof the steering column includes your:

0 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there untilyou 0 Headlamp HighLow Beam Changer complete your lane change. The lever willreturn by Flash-to-Pass itself when you release it. WindshieldWipers

0 WindshieldWasher CruiseControl 2-34 As you signal a turn or lane a change, if the arrowsdon’t Headlamp HighlLow Beam Changer flash butjust stay on, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.If you have To change the headlamps the Driver Information Center,it will tell you if you from low b’eam to high have a burnedout bulb. See “Driver Information beam or high beamto low Center” in the Index. beam, pull the turn signal lever toward you. Then If a bulb is burned out, replaceit to help avoid an release it. When the high accident. If the arrows don’t goon at all when you beams areon, this light signal a turn, check thefuse and for burned-out bulbs. 011. the instrument panel will See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the Index. also be on. nrnSignal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flashof the turn Flash-To-Pass Feature signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever This featurelets you use your high-beam headlamps to to theoff position. signal a driverin front of you that you want to pass. It works even if your headlamps areoff. To use it, pull the turn signal lever towardyou a little, but not so far thatyou hear a click. If your headlamps areoff or on low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on - I- as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high-beam indicatoron the dash will come on. Release the lever to turn the high-beam headlampsoff. Windshield Wipers singlewiping cycle, a For turnband the to MIST. Hold it there untilthe wipers start, then letgo. The wipers will stop after one cycle.If you want mure cycles, hold the band on MIST longer. For steady wiping at low speed,turn the band away from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, toHI. To stop the wipers,move the band toOFF. The wiper speed maybe set for a longor short delay between wipes.This can be very usefulin light rain or snow. Turn the band tochoose the delay time. The closer to LO, the shorter: the delay. Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A circuit breakerwill stop the motor until it cools. Clear away snow or ice to preventm overload The windshield wipers are controlled turningby the Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent band markedWER. you from seeing well enough to drive safely.To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them. If your blades do become damaged, get new bladesor blade inserts. Windshield Washer Cruise Control At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever there’s a paddle with the wordPUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddlefor less than a second. The wiperswill clear the window and either stop or returnto your preset speed. For more washer on the accelerator. his can cycles, push and holdthe paddle. Remember, driving really helpon long trips. without washer fluid can be dangerous.A bad mud splash can block your vision.You could hit another vehicle or gooff the road. Check your washer fluid level often. Some models have WASHERa FLUID warning, that indicates if the fluid levelin the windshield washer Cruise controldoes not work at speeds below about reservoir is low. See “Low WasherFluid Warning Light” 25 mph (40 km/h). in the Index. When you apply your brakes, thecruise control shuts off. A CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. A CAUTION:

~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~ Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise controlon winding Ifyou leave your cruise control switchon when roads or in heavy traffic, you’re not using cruise,you might hit a button and Cruise control can be dangerous on go into cruise when youldon’twant to. You could slippery roads. On suchroads, fast changes be startled and even lose control. Keepthe cruise in tire traction cancause needless wheel control switchOFF until you want to use it. spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise controlon slippery roads. 1. Move the cruise control switchto ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. If your vehicle isin cruise control when theoptional traction control system begins to limit wheelspin, the 3. Push in the SET button cruise controlwill automatically disengage. (See at the end of the lever “Traction ControlSystem” in the Index.) When road and release it. conditions allow you to safely useit again, you may turn the cruise control backon. 4. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal.

’ 2-38 Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed There are two ways to goto a higher speed: and then you apply the brake.This, of course, shutsoff Use the accelerator pedalto get to the higher speed. the cruise control. Butyou don’t need to resetit. hshthe button at theend of the lever, then release Once you’re going about the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll now 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, cruise atthe higher speed. you can move the cruise Move the cruise switchfrom ON to R/A.Hold it control switchfrom ON to there until you getup to the speed you want, and R/A (resume/accelerate) then release the switch.To increase your speedin for about half a second. very smallmounts, move the switch toR/A for less than half a second and then releaseit. Each time you do this, your vehicle willgo about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

, faster. The accelerate feature will only work after you have set the cruise control speedby pushing theSET button. You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. Remember that if you hold the switchR/A at longer than half a second, th’e vehicle will keep going faster untilyou release the switch or apply the brake. You could be startled and even lose control.So unless you want togo faster, don’t hold the switchR/A. at

1. 2-39 Reducing SpeedWhile Using Cruise Control Using Cruise Control on Hills There are twoways to reduce your speedwhile using How well your cruise control will workon hills depends dsecontrol: upon your speed, load andthe steepness of the hills. Push in the button at theend.of the lever untilyou When going up steephills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going reach the lower speed you want, then release it. downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear To slow down in very small amounts, push the to keep your speed down.Of course, applying the brake button for less than halfa second. Each timeyou takes you out of cruise control. Many driversfiid this to do this, you'll go 1 mph (1.6 h/h)slower. be too much trouble and don't usecruise control on steep hills. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increaseyour speed. When Ending Cruise Control you take yourfoot off the pedal, yourvehicle.will slow There are two waysto turn off the. cruise control: down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier. Step lightly on the brake pedal; or 0 Move the 'cruise switchto OFF. Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise controlor the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-40 Lamps Pull the switch out all theway to turn on the headlamps, together with:

Headlamps 0 ParkingLamps 'Pull the switch to the 0 SidemarkerLamps first stop to on turn 0 Taillamps the: 0 Instrument Panel Lights ParkingLamps SidemarkerLamps Push theswitch in all the way toturn all the lampsoff. Taillamps Lamps On Reminder InstrumentPanel If you open the driver's doorwhile leaving the headlamps Lights or parking lamps switchon and the keyis removed from the ignition, you will heara warning chime.

I' I .. ,i. ' Daytime Running Lamps To idle your vehicle with theDIU off, shift the transaxle intoPARK (P). The DRL will’ stayoff until Daytime Running Lamps (Dm)can make it easier for YOU Shift Out Qf PARK (P). others to see the frontof your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving At night, you canturn off conditions, but they canbe especially helpful in the all exterior lamps whenyou short periods after dawn and before sunset. are in PARK (P) by moving A light sensoron top of the instrument panel monitors the twilight sentinel control the exterior light level for the operationof DlU and all the way toMIN. twilight sentinel,so .be sure it isn’t covered. TheDRL system will make your low-beam headlamps comeon at a reduced brightness when: The ignition is on, 0 The headlamp switch is OFF and The transaxle is notin PARK (P). If it was on MIN, move the control tothe right to turn it When the DRL are on, onlyyour low-beam headlamps on, then back to“4. The lamps will come back on will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps when you put the transaxlein gear. won’t be on.Your instrument panel won’t be lighted either. 3 Twilight sentinel will keep your headlamps on for up When it’s dark enough outside, your low-beam to three minutes, to light yourway when you leave headlamps will change tofull brightness. The other YOU vehicle. lamps that come on with your headlamps willalso come on. When it’s brightenough outside, the regular lamps See “Twilight Sentinel” laterin this section tolearn how will go off, and your low-beam headlamps change to the to operate this feature. reduced brightnessof DRL. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. 2-42 Fog Lamps Twilight Sentinel The switch for your fog Push in the headlamp switch lamps is in frontof the front to turn your headlamps off. reading lamps. Turn the twilight sentinel knob located behind the headlamp switch toward MAX.

An indicator light in the switchwill glow when thefog lamps are on. Your headlamps must be on low beams or your parking lamps must be on for your fog lamps At night, you can turn off all exterior lamps when you are to work. in PARK (P) by moving the twilight sentinel controlall the way to MIN. If it was onMIN, move the control to the right to turn it on, then back to MIN. The lamps will come back on when youturn the knob towardMAX. Twilight sentinel will keep your headlamps on forup to three minutes, to light your way when you leave your vehicle.

2-43 To operate twilight sentinel,turn the control to MAX for locking the doorswill override the delayed illumination the three minute delay.Turn it the other wayto reduce feature and the lamps willturn off right away. the delay. Turn the control to MIN to turn twilight sentinel off. Theater Dimming

,. Also, it's possible that your headlamps mygo out if This feature allows for a thee to five-second fade outof the courtesy lamps insteadof immediate off. ': ,_.:'. * ,. :' you drivefrom a dark area intoa bright area likea turn

' lighted parking lot.If this happens,turn on your headlamps with the regular headlamp switch. Exit Lighting With this feature, the interior lampswill come on for Interior Lamps 25 seconds after you removethe key from the ignition. This will give you time to fhd the door pull handleor Instrument Panel .Intensity/Brightness lock switches. Control You can brighten ordim your instrument cluster lights Illuminated Entry (Option) by turning the headlampswitch. Turn the switch When you lift the handleof either front door,a Imp clockwise to brighten the instrument cluster lightsand will glow aroundthe door lock.This will help you insert displays. Turn the switch clockwiseall the way t'oturn the door key at night. on the interior courtesylamps. Turn the switch The lamps inside your vehicle willalso go on. These counterclockwise to dim the instrument cluster lights lamps willgo off after about 25 seconds, orwhen you displays to turn off the courtesy lamps. and and start your engine. These lamps will also go on when Delayed Illumination you press any button on the optional Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. When you open the door, theinterior lamps will come on. When youclose the door with the ignitionoff, the If a door is left ajar,your interior lampswill turn off interior lamps will stay foron 25 seconds or until the after 10 minutes to saveyour battery. ignition is turned to an on position. Please note that Front Reading Lamps Rear Reading Lamps

/ These lamps and the interior These overhead lamps and courtesy lamps will come on the interior courtesy lamps when you open the doors. will come on when you open thedoors,

To turn on a reading lamp when the doors are closed, To turn on the reading lamp when the dooris closed, press either switch. Pressit again to turn the lamp off. slide the switchup. Slide it down to turnoff the lamp. TO avoid draining your vehicle’s battery, be sure to turn Inadvertent Load Protection off the reading lamps when leaving your vehicle. This feature shutsoff the courtesy, reading, trunk, glove box and visor variity mirrorlamps, if any are left onfor more than 10 minutes whenthe ignition is OFF. This will keep your battery fromrunning down.

..

.. :. 1 2-45 Mirrors Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror (Option) Iwide Day/Night Manual Rearview Mirror

Your Pontiac may have an automatic electrochromic When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, day/night rearviewmirror. adjust the mirrorso you can see clearly behind your car. Grip the mirror in the centertomove it up or down and This mirror automatically changesto reduce glare from side to side.The day-night adjustment allows youto headlamps behindyou A photocell on the backof the adjust the mirror to avoid glarefrom the headlamps mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another behind you. Pull the tabf6mard for daytime use. Push it photocell builtinto the mirrur surface, senses when back for night use. headlamps are behind you.

2-46 At night, when the glare is too high, the mirrorwill Cleaning the Photocells gradually darken to reduce glare(this change may takea Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the few seconds). The mirror will return toits clear daytime photocellswhennecessary. ' :... .. state when the glare is reduced. ,. Press the button at the baseof the mirrorto turn on the Manual Remote Control.Mirror automatic feature. The button hasan indicator lightto The outside rearview mirror should be adjustedso you show it is on. Press the button again toturn the can just see the sideof your vehicle when you aresitting automatic off. in a comfortable driving position. Time Delay Adjust the driver's side outside mirror with the control lever on the driver's door. The automatic mirror hasa time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from the night backto To adjust your passenger's side mirror, insit the driver's the day position. This delay prevents rapid changingof seat and havea passenger adjust the mirror for you. the mirror asyou drive under lightsind through traffic. Reverse Gear Day Mode The reverse day modeis another important feature of the electrochromic mirror. When you shift into REVERSE (R),the mirror changes to the day mode. This gives you a bright image in the mirror as you back up. Power Remote Control Mirrors (Option) Convex Outside Mirror You passenger’s ‘sidemirror is convex. A convex A control lever on the ’ driver’s door controls both mirror’s. surface is curvedso you can see morefrom the outside rearviewmirrors. driver’s seat. A CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. - ’. ... If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you .. could hit a vehicle on your right. Checkyour Turn the lever to the left to selectthe driver’s side inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before rearview mirror,or to the rightto select the passenger’s changing lanes. side rearview mirror.Then push the leverin the direction of the desired movement to adjust each &ur so that you can see the sideof the vehicle when you are sittirag in a comfortable driving position. To lock the control, turn the lever to the center position. This will keep the mirror &om moving if. the switchis accidentally bumped.

2-48 Storage Compartments Center Console Cupholder/Coinholder (Option) Glove Box Use the door key to lock and unlock theglove box. To open, lift the latch releaseon the left sideof the glove box door. Card Holder (Option)

\

Press the button at the front edge to open the armrest storage area for cassette tapes, gloves, A etc. cupholder flips forward for use. The front doors on some vehicles have a card holder for convenient storageof business cardsor parking lot ticket stubs. The card holder has spaceup for to five regular business cards.

2-49 Overhead Cormsole Door Cupholder S-es Storage Compartment (Option) Some modelshave a storage compartment for glassesin your overhead console. Press the releasebutton to lower the door. Place your glasses inside the door.To close the door, raise it and press it into position. ,

The front doors provide spacefor holding a cup or soft drink.

2-50 Rear Storage Compartment Your Pontiac hasa rear storage armrest with cupholders and a pass-through feature.

Pull down the interior doorto access the trunk.

Lift the rearof the armrest to reveal the storage space.

2-51 ,Accessory PowerOutlet On models with the overhead console, there a is 12-volt ignition-fed outlet. Slide the cover aside to access the outlet.

NOTICE:

Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should.This wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment; and never use anything requiring more than15 amps.

~~ Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You'll see it just inside the back wallof the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the Itnet. can help keep them from falling overduring sharp turns or quick starts and stops. For heavier loads, store themin the trunk as far forward as YOU can. You can unhook thenet so that it will lie flat when you're not using: it.

2-52 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter NOTICE: To us6 a lighter,just push the centerin all the way and let it go. Whenit ‘isready the center will pop back by itself. Pull out the entire unit to use it. Don’t put papers and otherthings that burn into .your ashtrays.If you do, cigarettes or other

\ smoking materials could set them on fire, causing NOTICE: damage.

Don’t hold a cigarette lighterin with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to Sun Visors back away from the heatingelement when it’s To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.You ready. That canmake it overheat, damaging the can also remove them fromthe center mountand swing lighter and the heatingelement. them to the side, while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block glarefrom the front.

Lift the cover to reveal thefront ashtray. To clean the ashtray,lift it out by pulling on the snuffer. On models without a console, there’san ashtray/cupholder under the instrument panel.To clean the ashtray,lift it out by pulling up onthe tabs on either side. It snaps back into place. To open the rear ashtrays,lift the cover.

2-53 Visor Vanity Mirror Air Inflator System

Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror. Some vehicles have an air inflatorfor use in maintaining If your vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors, proper air pressurefor the tires.The air inflator is the lamps come on whenyou open the cover.You can located in the trunk. The ON switch will work only with adjust the brightness of the lampsby moving the switch, the ignition on. If you wantto stop the sunroofin a partially open position, lightly press the switch again.To completely open the sunroof, press the switch rearward again.The sunshade can also be opened by hand. Inflating something too much can make it explode, and you or others could be injured.Be To close the sunroof, press and hold the control switch forward to close the glass panel and sunshade. sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure. When the sunroofis in the closed position, press the control switch forward theto vent position. Openthe c I sunshade by hand. The air inflator comes with kita that includes a 20-foot (6.1 m) hose and ,an air pressure gage, as well as Press the switch rearward to close the rear vent. instructions and special adaptersfor inflating thingslike Your sunroof provides an airy, spaciousfeel to your an air mattress or a basketball. vehicle's interior and can also increase ventilation.It includes a sliding glass panel and a sliding sunshade. Sunroof (Option) The control switch will work only when the ignition is on or during Retained Accessory Power,if you have that Your Bonneville may option. See "Retained Accessory Power"in the Index. be equipped withan express-open sunroof. Press the control switch rearward and releaseit to open the glass panel and sunshade. Instrument Panel

2-56 i: . . I.

i 1. Twilight Sentinelmeadlamp Switch 8. Climate Control System 2. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 9. Passenger's Side Air Bag 3. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever 10. Glove Box

I 2 ,,: '14. Instrument Cluster/Gages 11. Audio System . ..

c3; ;,5. Audio System Steering Wheel Controls 12.Hazard Warning Flashers Switch .' - . .. .;: I . ,.< , , I. . . .. , , , .. 6. Ignition Switch 13. Driver's Side SRS Air Bag 7. Air Outlet 14. Hood Release

2-57 Instrument Panel Clusters Your -ent panel clustersare designed to let you know ata glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll how how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many otherthings you’ll need to drive safelyand economically. Your Pontiac is equipped with oneof these instrument panel clusters, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages.

m111 0 izlamam

UNLEIDEO FUEL ONLY 5%

Cluster with Gages Cluster with Compassand Gages

2-59 Cluster withCompass and Boost Gage

.> . .-(_ .. , -!

2-60 Speedometer and Odometer Trip Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles The trip odometercan tell you howfar you have driven per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your since you last reset it. odometer shows howfar your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the Driver Information Centeron vehicles so equipped. Your Pontiac has a tamper resistant odometer.If you see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know that someone has probably triedto turn it back, so the numbers may not be true. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needsa new odometer installed.If the new one can be set to the mileage totalof the old odometer, thenit must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must beon put the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. To set itto zero: On vehicles with the Driver Information Center, press the button labeledTRIP. On vehicles with the LAMP MONITOR, the button is next to the trip odometer. Push and release in a . smooth, continuous motionuntil all zeroes appear.

2-61 Tachometer (Option) Warning lights come onwhen there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you The tachometer shows your will seein the details on the next few pages, some engine speed in revolutions warning lights come on briefly when you start the per minute (rpm).Do not engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are run your engine at speedsin familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed the red area. when this happens. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to youlet know when there’s a problem withyour vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators there may be a problem, check the section that tellsyou This part describes the warning lights and gages that what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. may be on yourvehicle. The pictures will helpyou Waiting to do repairs canbe costly -- and even locate them. dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’rea big help. Waming lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to causean Your vehicle may also have a driver information center expensive repairor replacement. Paying attention to that works along with thew,arning lights and gages. See “Driver Information Center’’in the Index. your warninglights and gages could&so save YOU or others frominiurv.

2-62 Safety Belt Reminder Light Air Bag Readiness Light When the key is turned RUNto or START, a chime will There is an air bag readiness lighton the instrument come onfor about eight seconds to remind people to panel, which showsAIR BAG. The system checks the fasten their safety belts. ’ air bag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system The safety belt light will check includesthe air bag sensors, theair bag moduIes, also comeon and stay on the wiring andthe crash sensing ahd diagnostic module. for about 70 seconds. If the For more infomation on the air bag system, see“Air driver’s beltis already Bag” in the Index. buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on. You will see this lightflash for a few seconds when you turn your ignition to ,RUN or STmT. Then thelight AIR @a should go out. This means BAG 4 the systemis ready.

If the air bag readinesslight doesn’t come onwhen you start your vehicle, or stayson, or comes onwhen you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. Battery Light Voltmeter This light will come on You may have a voltmeter briefly When you start the unless you have the vehicle: as a check'to show supercharged engine. you it is working; thenlit should go .out. <-fi18

If it stays on,or comes on while youaxe driving, you When the engineis running, the gage showsthe may have a problem with the electrical ,chatging system. coqdition of the charging system. Readings outsidethe ' It could indicate that you havea generator problemor red warning zone indicate the normal operating range. another electrical system problem. Have it checked Readings in the red warningzone indicate a pos'sible right away. Driving whilethis light ison could drain problem in the electricalsystem. The CHECK GAGES your battery. light will also come on,and a warning chime will sound. If you must drive shorta distance with the lighton, be Have your vehicle serviced immediately. oertain to off all your accessories, such the radio turn as when your engine is not running, but the ignitionis on and, climate control system; (in the RUN position), the gage shows your battery's Some clusters withgages do not have a battery warning state of charge in DC volts. light. They have a CHECK GAGES warning to indicate a problem. Vehicleswith- the superchargedenginealso have a similar battery warning light. Brake System Warning Light If the warninglight comes on, there could be a brake A CAUTION: problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. Your brake system may not be working properly This light should comeon if the brake system warning light is on. Driving when you turn the ignition key to START. If it doesn’t with the brake system warning light on can lead come on then, haveit fixed to an accident. If the lightis still on after you’ve so it will be ready to warn pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have ,BRAKE (a)you if there’s a problem. the vehicle towed for service. When the ignitionis on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brike doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive off with the parking brake set, If the light and chime comeon while you are driving, a chime will also come on until you release the parking pull off the road and stop carefully.You may notice that brake. If the light and chime stay on after your the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal maygo closer parking brakeis fully released,it means you have a to the floor. It may take longer to stop.If the lightis still brake problem. on, have the vehicle towedfor service. (See “Towing You Vehicle” in the Index.) Anti-Lock Brake System Warhing Light If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light I comeson when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible With the anti-lock brake and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engineagain to system, &is fight will come reset the system.If the light still stays on, or comeson

on when youstart your I again while you’re driving, your Pontiac needs service. ,engine and may stay on for If the regular brake system warning light isn’t you on, several seconds. That’s still have brakes,but YOU don’t have anti-lock brakes. ANTILOCK (@) normal. If the regular brake systemwarning light is’also on, YOU don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this part. 1 The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition keyRUN. to If the light doesn’tcome on then, have‘it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. Traction Control System Warning The traction control system warning light may comeon Light (Option) for the following reasons: If you turn the systemoff by pressing the button This warning light should located on the center console,the warning light will come on brieflyas you start come on and stayon. To turn the systemback on, the engine. If the warning press the button again.The warning light should go light doesn’t come on then, off. (See “Traction Control System” in the Indexfor TRACTION have it fixed so it will be more information.) ready to warn youif there’s OFF a problem. 0 If there’s a brake system problem thatis specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come Ifon. your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turnoff and the warning lightwill come an your brakes cool down. If it stays on, or comes on when you’remvmg, there until may be a problem with your traction control system and If the traction control system is affectedby an your vehicle may need service. When this warning light engine-related problem, the system willturn off and is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your the warning lightwill come on. driving accordingly. If the traction control system warninglight comes on and stays onfor an extended periodof time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. Low Coolant Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage If you have this lightand it This gage shows the engine comes on, your system may coolant temperature. be low on coolant and the If the gage pointer moves engine may overheat. into thered ,area, your LOW engine is too hot! The COOLANT CHECK GAGES light will go on and a warning chime will sound, if you have this option.

Check to seeif the levelis low at the recoverytank, and It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you add coolantif necessary. If the levelis not low, have have been ‘operating your vehicle undernormal driving your low coolant warning system serviced. See “Engine conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your Coolant” in the Index. vehicle and turn ,off the engine assoon as possible. The LOW COOLANT warning lightwill also come on In the section “Problems on the Road,”this manual when you turn on the ignition, but your engineis not explains what to do.See “Engine Overheating”in running, as a check to showyou it is working. If it the Index. doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed right away. After the buIb check, the lightwill go out for20 seconds. If the light comes backon after 20 seconds, the system may be low on ,coolant. See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index. , .-; ’. . .-. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) NOTICE: 1.

Your Pontiac is If you keep driving your vehicle with this light equipped with.a , ' . on, after a while, your emission controls may not computer which work as well, your fuel economy may not as be monitors operationof the fuel, ignition and good and your engine may not runas smoothly. CHECK emission control This could leadto costly repairs that may not be systems. covered by your warranty. .

This light should comeon, as a checkto show you it is working, when the ignitionis on andthe engine is not running. If ,thelight doesn't come on, haveit repaired. This system is called OBD11 (On-Board This light willalso come on during a malfunctionin one Diagnostics-Second Generation) andis intended of two ways: to assure that emissions areat acceptable levelsfor 0 Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand environment. (In Canada, OBD11 is replaced by may damage the emission control system on your Enhanced Diagnostics.)The CHECK ENGINElight vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service and service is required. is required. Malfunctions often will be indicatedby the system before any problemis apparent, which may 0 Light On Steady -- An emission controlsystem prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.This malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. system is also designed to assist your service technician Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. service may be required. ,,-.I - ~ .I.<.’.) . If the LightIs Flashing ...e If the Light Is On Steady L:‘:’r’ j. ,

0 Avoid liard accelerations. If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sureto fully install the cap. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel 0 Avoid steep uphill grades. cap has been left off or improperly installed.This will 0 If towing a trailer, reduce the amountof wgobeing allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere.A few hauled as soon as itis possible. driving trips should turn the light off. If the light stopsflashing and remains on steady, see“E Rid you just drive through a deep puddleof water? the LightIs On Steady” following. If so, your electrical system maybe wet. The condition If the light continuesto flash,, when isit safe to doso, will usually be corrected whenthe electrical system stop the vehicle. Put your vehiclein PARK (P), Turn the dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart theengine. If the light remainson steady, see“If the LightIs On Steady” following. If the lightis still flashing follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealeror qualified service center for service. Are you low onfuel? Engine Oil Pressure 1,ig.ht As your engme starts to runout of fuel, your enginemay If you have a problem with not run as’ efficiently as designed since small- amountsof your oil, this light maystay air are suckedinto the fuel line causing a misfire. The on after you start your system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this engine, or come on when condition. Make sure to install the fuelcap properly. It you are driving. will take a few driving ,tripsto turn the lightoff. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? If so, be sure tofuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see “Fuel” in the Index). Poorfuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficientlyas designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling whenyou put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on This may indicate thatoil is not going through your acceleration orstumbling on acceleration. (These’ engine quickly enough to keepit cool. the engine could conditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) be low on oil,or could have some otheroil problem. This will be detectedby the system and cause the light If you are driving, carefully pull overto a safe location to Imn on. and stop to check the oil level.See “Checking Engine If you experiencethis condition, change the fuel brand Oil” in the Index. you use. It will require at least onefull tank of the If the engine oil is low, add oil as required. See “Adding proper fuelto turn the lightoff. Engine Oil” in the Index. If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, have your dealeror qualified service center checkthe vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment.and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.

3 71 Check Oil Level Warning Light I /r\ CAUTION: This light indicates when the engine oil level is 1 to Don't keep driving if the oil pressureis low. If 1 1/2 quarts (0.95 L to you do,.your engine can becomeso hot that it 1.4 L) low. It will go on for catches fire.You or others could be burned. CHECK OIL one to three seconds when Check your oil as soon as possible and have your LEVEL the ignitionis turned to the vehicle serviced. RUN position, as a bulb check to show you that the system is working.

I NOTICE: Ir If the light doesn't come on, haveyour oil level warning ~ ~~ svstem serviced. Damage to your engine from neglectedoil problems can be costly andis not covered by your warranty.

' .C. .: r :?

- '\ Even if you have a low oil level, the lightwill go off for Oil Pressure Gage 15 to 20 seconds. Then, if the oil level is low, and it has been at least eight minutessince your engine was last The oil pressure gage shows running, theCHECK OIL LEVEL light will come on the engine oil pressure in psi for 20 to 40 seconds. The eight-minute delay allows the (pounds per square inch) majority of the oil to drain back into theoil pan and when the engine is rwmhg. prevent a false low condition. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kiloPascals). If the CHECK OIL LEVEL warning comes on, theoil level should be checked at oilthe dipstick. If the level is low, the engineoil should be brought upto the proper level. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. After restoring the proper level and waiting for the eight-minute drainback, the key can be turned to theRUN position and the CHECK OIL LEVEL warning light shouldonly come Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside on as a bulb check. temperature and oil viscosity, but readings abovethe red warning zone indicate the normal operating range. A reading in the red zonemay be caused by a,’ dangerously lowoil level or other problem causing low oil pressure.The CHECK GAGES light will go on and. a warning ch@e will sound, if you havethis option. Driving yourvehicle with low oil pressure cancause extensive ,engine, damage. Low Washer Fluid Warning Light Check Gages Warning ,,Light (Option) This light will come on This light will come on when your windshield briefly when youare washers are working 'and the starting the engine. fluid container is lessthan WASHER FLUID one-third full. CHECK GAG.ES

Driving without washer fluidcanbe dangerous. A bad If the light comeson and stays on while you are driving, mud splash can blockyour vision. You could collide check your gages forfuel, coolant temperature,okl with another vehicle. Check your washerfluid often, pressure or voltage.This light will stay on if your engine and add only theproper fluid. See "Windshield Washer is not running. Fluid" inthe Index.

- ._ .... Fuel Gage Boost Gage (Option) Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left, when the ignition is on. When the gage inreads the yellow band, a warning chime will sound and the CHECK GAGES warning light will goon, if you have this option. Here are some things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage: At the service station, the gas pump shutsoff before the gage readsFULL (F). OST It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full,it but actually took a little more orless than half the tank's capacity tofill the tank. Vehicles equipped with the supercharged engine have 0 The gage movesa little when you turn a corner, this boost gage that indicates vacuum during lightto. speed up, or make a hard stop. moderate throttle and boost under heavier throttle.The The gage doesn't go back toEMPTY (E) when you gage displaysthe air pressure levelin psi going intothe turn off the ignition. engine's combustion chamber. If you have the large span (220")gage, the needle The gageis automatically centeredat zero psi every moves more for agiven amount of fuel.This does not time the engineis started. Actual vacuum or boostis indicate excessivefuel consumption, andis normal. displayed from this zero point. Changesin ambient pressure, suchas driving in mountainsand changing weather, will slightly change the zero reading. Head-Up.Display (Opth)

Q CHECK GAGES

If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in .your fieldof view, it may take you more time to see thingsyou need to see when it's dark outside. I km/h Be sure to keepthe HUD image dim and placed MPH low in your field of view. I If you have the optional Head-UpDisplay (HUD), you can see someof the driver informationalso mailable on your instrument panel cluster.The infomation may be HWD shows these images when theyare lighted on the displayed in English or metric units and appearsas a instrument panel. reflection on the wjndshield. TheHUD shows: When you sit straight inyour seat, the HUD image will Speedometerreading appear slightly to the right. Turn signal indicators When the ignition keyis turned to RUN, all possible HUD images will comeon, then the Head-Up Display High-beam indicator symbol will operatenormally,, CHECK GAGES message (for law oil pressure, high coolant temperature,low oil level and low fuel)

0 Low fuel warning symbol.

2-76 If you never look at your instrument panel, you may not see something important, such asa warning light. So be sure to scan your displays andcontrols and the driving environmentjust as you wouldin a vehicle without HUD.

NOTICE:

Although the HUD image appears to be near the

front of the vehicle, do notuse it as a parking aid. ’ The HUD was not designed for that purpose. Ifyou try to use it that way, suchas in a parking lot, you may misjudge distance andrun into something. The HUD controls are located to the leftof the steering column. 1. Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer control all the way up. The brightness of the HUD image is determinedby whether the headlamp switch onis or off, and where you have set theHUD dimmer control.

2-77 2. Adjust the seat,if necessary, b’efore setting the Spray household glass cleaneron a soft, clean cloth. height control. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it.Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens, becausethe cleaner fluid Slide the (image height) cimtrol the way ADJUST all could leak inside theunit you do. up, raising the image asfar ,as possible. Thenslide if the HUD image height control downso the imageis If you can’t see theHUD image when the ignition is on, as low aspossible butin full view. check to see if: 3. Slide the dimmer control downwarduntil the HUD 0 The headlamps are on. image is no brighterthan necessary. To turn the HUD Anything is covering the HUD unit. off, slide theHUB dimmer coptrolall the way down. 0 The HUD dimmer controlis adjusted correctly. If the sun comes out,or it becomes cloudy, ur if you turn on your headlamps, you may need to adjust them The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height. brightness using the HUD ciirrmer co&ol. Polarizing 0 A fuse in the fuse panel may be blown. See “Fuses sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see. and Circuit Breakas” in the Index. Pushing $he uptional ENG/MET (English/metric) button If the F€WR image is not clearit could betoo bright, on the instrument panelcluster will switch the HUD move the HUD dimmer control furtherdownward. You speedometer from English (conventional) to metric may need to clean the windshieldand HUD lens. units, or back again. Your windshieldis part of the HUD system. If you ever Clean the insideof the windshield as neededto remove have to have a new windshield, be sureto get one any dirt or film -thatreducesthe sharpness CJT clarity of designed for WUD. If you don’t, the HUD image may the HUD image. look blurred and outof focus. Driver Information Center FUNCTION MONITOR:This lets you knowif you are low on fluids or have a problem witha vehicle function: DRIVER TRIP 3 (-1 INFORMATION (I , J, CHECK OIL LEVEL:This message could mean your oil level is low.If it comes onfor more than three seconds, see "Check Oil Level Warning Light" . .. h I_ I e:.~. .. - CHECK OIL LEVEL LAMP in theIndex. - I MONITOR WASHER FLUID LOW COOLANT WASHER FLUID: This message means your CHECK QAOES washer fluid tank is less than about30% full. 'The VOOD DOOR TRUNK AJAR I TURN SIQNAL windshield portionof the vehicle outlinewill also BACK UP TAIL glow. If these comeon, see "Windshield Washer BRAKE LAMP I \ Fluid" in the Index. MlLES TRIP 888888 8 B 8 8.8 LOW COOLANT This message means your coolant level has fallento about half full. If it comes on, see "Engine Coolant" in the Index. If you have the Driver Information Center,it gives you CHECK GAGES:If this light comes on and stays important safety and maintenanc,e facts. When you turn on while you are driving, check your gages for fuel, the ignition on,the entire center lightsup for a few coolant temperature, oil pressure or battery voltage. seconds. Thenit goes to work. SECURITY: You'll get aDOOR AJAR message if a door is not fully closed. The vehicle outline will show you which door it is. Youwill also get aHOOD AJAR or TRUNK AJAR message if the hood or thetrunk isn't fully closed. The vehicle outline willalso show you . .. these areajar. .. ;,. . .,--. . ,(/,,:-I.. - : .. -* , , .. , ...... ! _. LAMP MONITOR: Whenever YOU try to use one of Message Bulbs Monitored the following lamps, theLAMP MONITOR will tell you Hi-BeamLamp ...... Both Headlamp High Beams if a bulb is out. Head Lamp ...... Both Headlamp Low Beams 0 Headlamp (Low and High Beam) Turn Signal ...... 1 Front Left Turnpark 1 Front RightTurnpark 0 tun^ Signal/Parking/Stop , 2 Rear LeftTurdstop 0 Parking Lampsidemkker \ 2 Rear Right Turn/Stop e Brake Lamp and Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Back-up ...... 2Back-Up Lamps .. qE2ack-Up Lamp Tail ...... 4TailOnly 4 Stop/Tail/Turn 0 Taillarnp/Turn/Sidemarker/license 2 License Plate If a bulbis out, you will see a message, suchas 'PARK Right Rear Sidemarker and you will also see where the problemis on LAMB, Left Rear Sidemarker the vehicle outline. The message stays on until the problem is fixed. See "Replacement Bulbs"in the Index Brake Lamp ...... 4 Rear Stop/Tail/Turn for bulb details. 1 Center High-MountedStop Park Lamp ...... 2 Front Park If a burned-outbulb is replaced, the warning light will Right Sidemarker . stay on until the bulb is used. , Left Sidemarker

i: .- , ' 8. I L. Electronic Compass (Option) The earth's magnetic fieldis not always the same direction as true north as we knowSo, it. you must enter a zone numberto tell the compass the difference between magnetic and actual north.This tells the

compass wherein the countryyou are drivingI The compass shows the zone numberin use each time you turn your key on. This is shown above. The number is turned off after a few seconds. I The compass remembersyour zone, so you only have to change it if you drive toa.new zone onthe map. The compass adjusts onlya small amountfor each zone, so you may not notice a difference if you drive from one zone to the nextone, until you cross several zones.

Some vehiclesare equipped with an electronic'compass. As with all compasses, this unit senses the earth's magnetic fieldto show the direction thecar is pointing.

.. ~ , .,- - .. .. .,'. B. .,-.:...... ' ..:. - -. .'Y,I '.. .- .; i;, ' ~ _.a: ' . .. ' ,; . , -. , :::,.;, . .,, ,I;;y'j,, 4. 'i ,_ I -;. i . :. .. .:.+-; i: . - . ... , i. . /I I< , ~i: I -'--x 'L i ... '3 _'

.. . Choosing Your Zone Number Changing Your Zone Number

ZONE 05)

1. Press and hold the MODE button until zone and the zone number appear. Locate your zone numberon the map above.If your 2. Release the MODE button. number is different than theone shown when you 3. Press theMODE button until your number appears. turn the keyon, follow the steps to changeyour zone number. 4. In a few seconds, the zone number andZONE turn off, and the new zone numberis remembered by If you live onthe line, you canpick the zone areayou the compass. are most likely todrive in. (In Alaska use Zone9 or 10. In Hawaii use Zone 7).

2-82 Calibrating the Compass Sometimes, strong magnetic fields can affect the compass. If the CALIBRATE light comes on as shown above, try calibrating the compassas follows: 1. Drive the car to an open, flat area.

' T 2. Press and hold the MODE button untilthe /CALIBRATE CALIBRATE light reappears. 3. Release the MODE button. The heading display will start to rotate. 4. Drive the carin small circles. Don't drive fasterthan 10 mph (16 km/h). 5. Drive in circles until theCALIBRATE light goes out. It usually takes oneto five circles. L NL . 6. Your compass should be calibrated.You will know this when the direction bars areon and the All electronic compasses need to knowthe magnetic CALIBRATE light is off. profile of your car.This is called calibration andis done automatically by your compass. But, the featureis available if you would like to manually calibrate.

2-83 Compass Accuracy The rear defog system can affect accuracy, theand Your compass may show different headings around compass corrects for thereatdefog. However, if the rear defbg is turned on while making the bridges, power lines, large metal objectsand steep hills. sharp turns, This is normal is trueof compasses in general. accuracy may be off. When you hun the rear defog off .' ' - and again, the accuracy returnsto normal. If yhu -put large metal objectslike golf clubs in the trunk .Do not on the res defog if you are trying to they could affect accuracy.If the accuracy close, the turn is calibrate. Thesystemwill not allowthe calibration. You compass will adapt tothese objects over time. will hear the chime, andCALIBRATE will flash fora If you use ah antenna witha magnetic base, itis best few seconds. to mountit away from the centerof the trunk near the Be aware that metal objects are sometimes buriedin the , ,.A ,>,L".{. ~ -,_..-. .-,-.- ~ rear window. , .-- ,, ST% .>t I, .:;? ._ , -5..I->- .. ground. They can affect accuracyand you may not know e. ' . : ,"E they are there.As an example, many concrete roads .. - I.

,I, . I have metal reinforcements inside. .Lt I '5

:i 'I

2-84 NOTES

QL NOTES

2-86 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section you'll find out how to operate the comfort Standard Climate Control System control and audio systems offered with your Pontiac. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle. Comfort Controls This section tells you how to make yo'ur air system work for you. Your comfortcontrol systemuses ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant. With these systems, you can control the heating, Fan Knob cooling and ventilation in your Pontiac.Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described The left knob is the fan knob and selects the force of later in this section. air you want. Turn the knob clockwiseto increase fan speed and counterclockwise to decreasefan speed. The fan will always run unlessthe right controlknob is turned toOFF. The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compressor.

3-1 Temperature Knob 12 BI-LEVEL: This setting directsair into your The center control regulates the temperatureof the air vehicle in two ways. Coolair is directed to the upper coming through the system.Turn it toward the blue area portion of your body through the middle instrument for coolerair. Turn it toward the red area forwmer air. panel outlets whilewarmed. airis directed to the floor. CI Mode Knob d VENT: This setting directs airflow through the middle instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning' The right control has settings forair conditioning and compressor is not working when VENT is selected. non-air conditioning modes. The mode control allows you to choose the directionof air delivery. I!HEATER: This se&ng directs warmedair through the floor outlets. Somewarm air is'diverted to the MAX: This setting provides maximum cooling withthe windshield to minimize fogging. least amount of work. MAX recircdates much of the air w. inside your vehicle so it cools quickly. +H DEFOG: his setting directs&to ~e HEATER Mc: his setting cools theair entering your vehicle outlets andtoward the windshield. and directs it through the instrument panel outlets. 9DEFROST: This setting directs mostof the air The air conditioning compressor operatesin all air toward the windshield.' conditioner positions...... ,' i

3-2 Electronic Climate Control System (Option) Mode Button Press this button to deliverair through the floor, middle or windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected mode untilthe MODE or AUTO button is pushed. Pressthe up arrow to cycle through the available modes. Automatic Operation When the systemis set for AUTO, sensors will control the air delivery mode.Air will come from thefloor, middle and windshield outlets. The fan speed willvary as the system maintains the selected temperature setting. To find your comfort zone, start with75°F (24°C) temperature setting, allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate. Pressthe TEMP button up or down to adjust the temperature settingif necessary. If you Fan Button choose the temperature settingof 60°F (15 "C), the The button withthe fan symbol adjusts the fan speed. system will remain at that maximum cooling setting Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down and will not regulate the fan speed.If you choosethe arrow to decrease fan speed. temperature settingof 90°F (33 O C), the systemwill remain at that maximum heating setting and will not Temperature Button regulate the fan speed. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not cause the system to heat or cool The TEMP button changes the temperature of theair any faster. coming through the system. Press the up arrowfor warmer air and the down arrowfor cooler air.

3-3 Pressing the AUTO button will display the requested Manual Operation temperature, fanspeed'and air delivery mode for five You may also manually adjust the delivery mode or seconds, then change to display the outsideair fan speed. temperature. Be careful notto put anything over the sensor locatedin the middleof the instrument panel near '!! HEAT: Manually selectingHEAT by cycling the windshield, or over the sensorin the gnlle above the through theMODE settings will deliverair to the floor radio. These sensors are used by the automatic system to outlets. regulate temperature. w. Manually selecting DEFOG by cycling The exterior temperature display sensor is in frontof the +# DEFOG: through theMODE settings will deliver to the floor car, near the radiator. This displayed temperatureis most air and windshield outlets. accurate when the vehicleis moving. During stops, or while idling, the displayshows the previous driving 12BI-LEVEL: Manually selecting BI-LEVEL by temperature for best system control. cycling through the MODE setting will deliver warm air To avoid blowing coldair in cold weather, the system to the floor and cooler air to the middle instrument panel will delay turningon the fan until warm air is available. outlets. The lengthof delay dependson outside air temperature, OFF: Press this buttonto turn the systemoff. Fresh air engine coolant temperature, and time since the engine will continue toflow through the vehicle, and the was last started. Pushing thefan button will overridethis system will try to maintain the previously set delay and change thefan to a selected single speed. temperature. The outside temperature will show in the If you leave your vehicle, the system will remember the display when the systemis OFF. control setting the next time you start your engine. A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning If you have the standard system, for quick cool-downon on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the very hot days,use MAX with the temperatureknob in air inside the vehicle.In the AUTO mode, the display the blue area.If this setting is usedfor long periodsof will show thatA/C is active, but theair conditioning time, the airin your vehiclemay become too cold and compressor only operates when the system determines dry. For normal cooling on hot days,use A/C with the it is needed. temperature knob in.the blue area. This setting cools the RECIRC,:Press this button to limit the amountof fresh air entering your vehicle and directsit through the air entering your vehicle.You may use this settingto instrument panel outlets. limit odors entering your vehicle. PressREClRC to If you have the electronic system, press the A/C button change to a manualMODE and air will recirculatefor to turn the system on. The system will cool and 10 minutes. RECIRC will show on the display and then dehumidify the air insidethe vehicle. Also while in return toEXT TEMP display. AUTO mode, the system will use FtECIRC as necessary DEFROST: Press this button to clearthe windshield. to cool the air. The system will automatically controlthe fan speed if &1 cool but sunny days, with thestandard system through you select defrost from AUTO. manual operationof the electron& system, useBI-LEVEL to deliver warm air to the floor and coolerair to the OFO C: ‘Pressthis button to display the temperaturein degrees Fahrenheitor Celsius. middle instrument panel outlets. To warrn or cool airthe delivered, push theTE- button up or down. Air Conditioning When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes notice On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed and power. inside air escape. This reduces the timeit takes for your This is normal because the systemis designed to cycle the vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed cornpressor on and off to keep the desired temperature. for the air conditioner to work its best. Heating If you have the standard system, on cold days use HEATER with the temperatureknob in the red area.If you have the electronic system, pressAUTO and adjust the temperature byp;essing the TEMP up or down arrow. You may also adjust the electronic system manually by pressing theMODE button and selecting HEAT. Again, adjust the temperatureby pressing the "EMF up or down arrow. With each system, outside airwill be brought in and sent through thefloor outlets. The heater works bestif you keep your windows closed while usingit. Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures whenlittkheating or Your vehicle has air outlets that allowyou to adjust cooling is needed, useVENT (on the standard system) the direction and amountof airflow inside the vehicle. to direct outside air through your vehicle.Air will flow Push the outlet upor down to directairflow to your through the middle instrument panel outlets. preference. Increase or reduce the amountof airflow by opening and closing the louvers. Openingand closing Your vehicle's flow-through ventilation system supplies the louvers willalso direct airflow from side-to-side. outside air into the vehicle when it's moving. When the vehicle is not moving, you can get outsideair to flow through by selecting anyair choice (except the rear ,window defogger) and anyfan speed. Ventilation Tips

0 Keep the hood andfront air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction such as leaves. The heater and defroster will work better, reducing the chanceof fogging your windows.

0 When you enter a vehicle with the standard system in cold weather, select HEATER to supply air through the floor outlets. Thenturn the fan on high for a few moments before driving away.This will blow moist air from the intake outlets toward the floor, not the windshield. It reduces the chance of foggingyour windows. If you have the electronic system, theAUTO setting will do this for you. Manual operationof the electronic system in theHEAT' mode will also supply If you have the rear seat passenger outlet, it's attached to air through the floor outlets. the back of the console.You can adjustthe airflow / 0 Keep the path under the front seats clearof objects. toward either seating area, the floor or upward. Turn the air This helps to circulate throughoutyour vehicle. end knobs up and down to direct airflow. Increaseor air reduce the amount of airflow by opening and closing the 0 When the engine idlesfor a longtime, the exterior louvers. Opening and closing the louvers will also direct temperature sensor may cause the system to blowair airflow from side-to-side. that is too cool. Once the vehicle is moving again the system willtry to maintain the set temperature inside your vehicle. 0 When you start your vehicle and the EXT TEMP display flashes (electronic system only) for some time, the system may need repair. Seeyour Pontiac dealer. Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger On cool, humid days, useDEFOG to keep the windshieId and side windows clear. UseDEFROST to remove fog or ice fi-om the windshield.quicklyin extremely humid or cold conditions. If you have thestandard system, use DEFOG and adjust the fan speed toyour comfort level.Use DEFROST with the temperature toward the redarea and the fan control towardhigh. If you have the electronic system,press the DEFOG button and adjust the fan speedby pressing thefan button up or down to yourcomfort level. Adjustfan The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass, speed by pressing thefan up or down arrow.If you Press the button tostart warming your window.If you select DEFROST fi-om AUTO, the system willcontrol have the standad system, a light will glow in the switch the fan speed. Adjust the temperature to your comfort while the defoggeris working. level by pressing the TEMP up QT UQ'W, . ,% <, .. ,.. . -. ' . After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself or press the Audio Systems button during the heating cycle to turnit off. If you need additional warming time, push the button again.The Your Delco@ audio system has been designed to operate system will then operate forfive minutesbefore going easily and give yearsof listening pleasure.You will get off by itself. the most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself with itfirst. Find out what your Delco system can do Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decalsand'how to operate all its controls, be to sure you're across the defogger gridon the rear window. getting the most outof the advanced engineering that went into it. I NOTICE: Setting the Clock for AM-FM Stereo Press SET. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the Don't use a razor blade or something else sharp SEEK down arrow untilthe correct hour appearson the on the inside of the rear window.If you do, you display. Press and hold the SEEK up arrow untilthe could cut or damage the warming grid, and the correct minute appearson the display. repairs wouldn't be coveredby your warranty. Setting theClock for All Systems Except AM-FM Stereo Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears. Press and hold MIN until the correct minuteappears. There will be a two-second delay beforethe clock goes into time-set mode, and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode.

.. . . . i .,,*.$' 3-9 reo PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to 14 stations (sevenAM and seven FM). 1. Press AM-FM to select the band.

2. Tune in the desired station.1 3. Press SET. 4. Within five seconds, press oneof the four numbered pushbuttons. Whenever you press that numbered

', pushbutton, the station you set will return. 5.. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

1. In addition to thefour stations set as above,up to three I ' Playing the I additional stationsmay be preset on each band by VOLUME: Turn this knob to turn the system on off.or pressing two adjoining buttons at thesame time. Just: Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume.Turn it 1. Tune iil the desired station. counterclockwise to decrease volume. 2. Press SET. RCL: Press the upper knob briefly to recall the station being played or the clock display. 3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time (within five seconds). AM-FM: Press the lowerknob to get AM or FM. The display shows your selection. 4. Whenever you press the same buttons, the station you set will return. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. SEEK: Press the up or downarrow to go to the next higher or lower station. Setting the Tone AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player BASS: Slide the lever up or downto increase or decrease bass. TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increaseor decrease treble.If a stationis weak or noisy, slide the lever down to reduce the noise. Adjusting the Speakers BALANCE: Turn the control behindthe upper knob to move the sound to the leftor right speakers. Use the . , I&<,. ._', . - , - middleposition to bhance thesespeakers. ,i;.< . :-; ;:& FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. Use the middle Playing the Radio position to balance these speakers. VOL: Push this knob toturn the system on or off. Turn it clockwise to increase volumeand counterclockwise to decrease volume. RECALL: Press this button brieflyto recall the station being played or the clock display.If you press the knob when the ignitionis off, the clock will showfor a few seconds.

3-11 Finding a Station’ Setting the Tone AM-FM: Press this button to getAM, FM1 or FM2. BASS: Slidcthe lever to the right or leftto b-crease or Tbe display shows your selection.If a cassette tape is decrease bass. playing, pressthis button to play the radio. TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase TUNE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn it to or decrease treble.If a station is weakor noisy, slide the choose radio stations. Pushthe hubback in when lever downto reduce the noise. you’re not using it. Adjustin’g theSpeakers SEEK: Press the upor down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station. BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extehds. Turn this t knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. Use PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let the middle positionto balance these speakers.Push the you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to knob back in when you’re not using it. 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. TLI~~this 1. Press AM-FM to select the band. knob to move the soundto the front or rear speakers. 2. Find the station you wantby using TUNE or SEEK. Use the middle positionto balance these speakers. Push the knob back in when you’re not usingit. 3. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display. Wheneveryou press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

c I ,-, 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. :1. I ,:. ,. . I.

3-12 Playing a Cassette Tape 0 Ell: The tape is broken. Trya new tape. You tape playeris built to work best with tapes that are If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error can'tbe 30 to 45 minutes longon each side. Tapes longer than corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio that are so thin they may not work wellin this player. displays an error number, writeit down and provide it to While the tapeis playing, use theVOL; FADE, BAL, your dealer when reporting the problem. TREBLE and BASS controls just as you do for the PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEKdown arrow to radio. The displaywill show an arrow to show which search for the previous selectionon the tape. Your tape side of the tapeis playing. When the down indicator must have at least three secondsof silence between each arrow is lit, selections listedon the bottom sideof the selection forPREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction cassette are playing.When the up arrow is lit, selections arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press listed on the top side of thecassette are playing. The PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching.The tape player automatically begins playing the other side sound is muted during PREV or SEEK operation. when it reaches the endof the tape. NEXT (2): Press this buttonor the SEEK up arrow to If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the won't play becauseof an error. button or pressit more than once, the player will ElO: The tape is tight and the player can't turn the' continue moving forward through the tape.Your tape tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tapewith the must have at least three secondsof silence between each selection forNEXT or SEEK to work. The tape open end down andtry to turn the right hub counterclockwise'with a pencil. Turn the tape over direction arrow blinks duringNEXT or SEEK operation. and repeat.If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape Press PREV or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching. may be damaged and should not be used in the The sound is muted during NEXT SEEKor operation. player. Try a new tape to make sure your playeris working properly.

3-13 PROG (3): Press this button to play the other sideof the .AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio whena tape tape. is in the player. DD (4): Press this button to reduce background noise. TAPE/PLAY: Press this button to change to the tape Note that the double-D symbolwill appear on the function whenthe radio ison. The tape symbol with an display. arrow will appear on the display when the tapeis active. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FMthe button. Dolby@ Noise Reductionis manufactured undera license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. EJECR Press this buttonto remove the tape., The radio

Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarksof will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ' Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ignition or radiooff. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this buttonis pressed first. REV (5):Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. does, your cas'sette tape player needsto be cleaned.It You may select stations duringREV operation .by using will still play tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as SEEK or TUNE. possible to prevent damageto your tapesand player. See "Care of Your Cassette Tape Player" in the Index. . FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to After you clean the player, press and holdEJECT another partof the tape. Press the button again to return for to playing speed. The radiowill play the'last-selected five seconds to reset theCLN indicator. The radiowill station while the tape advances.You may select stations display --- to show the indicator was reset. during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE. AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Finding a Station and? Equalizer AM-FM: Press this button to getAM, FM1 or FM2. The display shows your selection.If a cassette.tape is playing, press this buttonto play the radio. TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends.Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob backin when you’re not using it. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow go to to the next higher or lower station. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations.You can set upto 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). 1. Press AM-FM to select the band. Playing the Radio 2. Find the station you want by usingTUNE or SEEK. VOL: Push this knob to turn the system onoff. or Turn it clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to 3. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttons until decrease volume. SET appears on the display. Whenever you pressthat numbered button, the station you set will return. RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station being played theor clock display.If you press 4. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton. the knob when theignition is off, the clock will show Setting the Tone for a few seconds. EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizer partis of your audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or downto reduce frequency range.

3-15 Adjusting the Sa kers If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape won’t play because of error. BAL: Press ms Knob lightly so it extends.Turn it to an move the soundto the left or right speakers.Use the E10: The tape is tight and the playercan’t tunn the middle positionto balance these speakers. Push the knob tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the back in when you’re not using it. open end down andtry to turn the right hub FADE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turnit to counterclockwise witha pencil. Turn the tape over move the sound to the front or rear speakers. Use the and repeat. If the hubs do notturn easily, your tape middle position to balance these speakers. Push the knob may be damaged and should notbe used inthe back in when you’re not using it. player. Try a new tape tomake me your player is working properly. Playing a Cassette Tape Ell: The tape is broken. Try a new tape. Your tape playeris built to work best with tapes that are If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error can’t be 30 to 45 minutes longon each side.Tapes longer than corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio that are so thh they may not work wellin this player. displays an error number,write it down and provide it to While the tape is playing, use theVOLUME, FADE and your dealer when reporting the problem. BAL controls just as you do for the radio. The display PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to will show an mow to show which side of the tape is searGh for the previous selectionon the tape.Yow tape playing. menthe down indicator arrowis lit, selections must have at leastthree seconds of silence between each listed on the bottom sideof the cassette are playing. selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction When the up is lit, selections listed on the top side mow blinks dwmg PREV or SEEK operation. Press of the cassette are playing. The tape player PREV or the SEEK down arrowto stop searching. The automatically begins playing the other side when it sound is muted duringPFWV or SEEK operation. reaches the endof the tape.

3-16 NEXT (2): Press this button or theSEEK up arrow to FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to search for the next selection on the tape.If you hold the another partof the tape. Press the button again to return button or pressit more than once, the player will to playing speed. The radiowill play the last-selected continue moving forward through the tape.Your tape station whilethe tape advances.You may select stations must have atleast three secondsof silence between each during FWD operation by using SEEKor TUNE. selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape , AM-FM: Press this buttonto play the radio whena tape direction arrow blinks duringNEXT or SEEK operation. is in the player. Press PREV or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching. 1 The sound is muted during NEXT SEEKor operation. TAPEIPLAY: Press this button to change to the tape function whenthe radio is on.The tape symbol with an PROG (3): Press this button to play the other sideof the arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active. tape. To return to playing the radio, pressAM-FM the button. 00 (4): Press this button to reduce background noise. EJECT Press this button to remove the tape. The radio Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the I will play.EJECT may be activated with eitherthe display. ignition or radio off. Cassettes maybe loaded with the Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license radio off if this buttonis pressed first. from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby CLN: This message may appear on the display.If it and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby does, your cassette tape player needs beto cleaned. It Laboratories Licensing Corporation. will still play tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as REV (5): Press this buttonto reverse the tape rapidly. possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. Press it again to returnto playing speed.The radio will See “Careof Your Cassette Tape Player”in the Index. play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECTfor ,You may selectstations duringREV operation by using five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will SEEK or TUNE. display --- to show the indicator was reset.

. >. ’

! I. .. AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player Finding aStation AM-FM: Press this button to get AM, FMlor FM2. The displayshows your selection. TUNE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push theknob back in when you're not using, it. SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations.You can set upto 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). <- 1. Press AM-FM to select the band. Playing the Radio 2. Find the station you want by using TUNE or 'SEEK. VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on oroff. Turn it clockwise to increase volumeand counterclockwise to 3. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttons until decreasevolume. .~ SET appearson thethat display.pressWhenever you :.) " numbered button, the station you set will return. RECALL: Press this button brieflyto recall the stationbeing played or the clockdisplay. If you press 4. Repeatthe steps for each pushbutton. - the knob when the ignitionis off, the clock will showfor a few seconds.

3-18 Setting the Tone display. If you want toinsert a disc when the ignitionis BASS: Slide the lever to the rightleft or to increase or OFF, first press EJECT. decrease bass. If you're drivingon a very rough roador if it's very hot, TREBLE: Slide the lever to the rightleft or to increase the disc may not play andE (error) anda number may or decrease treble.K a station is weak or noisy, slide the appear on the radio display.If the. disc comes out,it lever down to reduce the noise. could be that: The disc is upside down. Adjusting the Speakers It is dirty, scratched or wet. BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to The air is very humid.(If so, wait about an hour move the soundto the left or right speakers. Use ' the middle positionto balance these speakers. Push the knob and try again.) back in when you're not using it. If any error occurs repeatedly ifor an error can't be FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to corrected, please contact your dealer.If yoy radio move the soundto the frontor rear speakers. Use the displays an error number, writeit down and provideit to middle positionto balance these speakers. Push the knob your dealer when reportingthe problem. back in whenyou're not using it. RECALL: Press this button tosee what track is playing. -*I. ', Press it again withinfive seconds to see how longit has Playing a CompactDisc been playing (elapsedtime). The track number also The integralCD player can play8 cm "single" appears when the disc is inserted, you change the mini-discs. Full-size compact discs and &-discs volume or when a new track starts playing. are loaded in the same manner. PREV (1): Press this button or theSEEK down arrow to Insert a disc partwayirito the slot,label side up. The go to the startof the current trackif more than eight seconds have played.If you hold the buttonor press it player will pullit in. The compact disc symbol will h. 1 ~-: - s- .. . appear on the display.If the ignitionis on, but the radio more than once, the playerwill continue moving back *_ . is off, the disc will begin playing.CD will appew.&.,." through the disc. 3-19 NEXT (2): Press this buttonor the SEEK up arrow to AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player go to the startof the nexttrack if more than eight and Equalizer secmds have played. If you hold the button or pressit more than once, the playerwill continue moving forward through the disc. RDM (3): Press this buttonto hear the tracksin a random order.It will change tracksin a random, rather than sequential order. PressRDM again to turn off random play. REV (5): Press and hold this buttonto return to a passage quickly. Releaseit to playthe passage. You will hear soundat a reduced volume. The display willshow elapsed time. FWD (6): Press and hold this buttonto advance toa passage quickly. Youwill hear sound at a reduced Playing the Radio volume. The display will show elapsedthe. VOL: Push this knobto turn the system on oroff. Tm AM-FM: Press this buttonto play the radio whena disc it clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to is playing. The discwill stop but remainin the player. decrease volume. CD/PLAY: Press this button to change to the disc RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station function when the radiois on. being played or the clock display. you press the knob when the ignitionis off, the clock will showfor a few EJECT Press this button to remove the disc or stop theseconds. disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the radio off.

3-20 Finding a Station Adjusting the Speakers AM-FM: Press this button to getAM, FM1 or FM2. BAE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn itto The display shows your selection. move the soundto the left or right speakers.Use the middle positionto balance these speakers. Pushthe knob TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turnit to choose radio stations. Push the knob backin when back in when you’re not usingit. you’re notusing it. FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the frontor rear speakers, Use the SEEK: Press the up or down arrow togo to the next higher or lower station. middle positionto balance these speakers. Push the knob* back in when you’re notusing it. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet you return to your favorite stations.You can setup - to Playing a Compact Disc 18 !stations (s& AM, six FM1and six FM2). The integralCD player can play8 cm “single” 1. Press AM-FM to selectthe band. mini-discs. Full-size compact discs and mini-discsare loaded in the same manner. 2. Find the station you want by usingTUNE or SEEK. Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The 3. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttons until player will pullit in. If the ignitionis on, but the radio is SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that off, the disc will begin playing. If you want to in%erta numbered button, the stationyou set will return. disc when the ignition off,is first pressEJECT. 4. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton. Setting the Tone EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizeris part of your audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range. P

If you're driving ona very rough road orif it's very hot, NEXT (2): Press this buttonar the SEEK up arrow to the disc may not play andE (error) and a number may go to the startof the next trackif more than eight appear on the radio display.If the disc comes out,it seconds have played.If you hold the button orpress it could be that: more than once, the playerwill continue moving furward through the disc. The disc is upside down. Press hear the tracksin a It is dm7scratched or wet. RDM (3): this button to random order. It will change discs andtracks in a random, rather The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and than sequential order. PressRDM again toturn o€f randm try again.) play. The radiowill' play during this operation.

::>, If any error occurs repeatedly ifor error can'tbe REV (5): Press hold this button to return toa _. an and :7% ,

corrected, please contact your dealer.If your radio passage quickly. Release itto play the passage.You will .I 's "f ' displays an error number, write it downand provide it to hear sound ata reduced volume.The display will show your dealer when reporting the problem. elapsed time. WECALL: Press this buttonto see what track is playing. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance toa Press it again within five seconds see to how long it has passage quickly.You will hear sound at a reduced been playing (elapsedtime). The track number also volume. WE display will show elapsed time. appears when the discis inserted, the volumeis changed or whefi a new track starts playing. AM-PM: Press this button to playthe radio when a disc is playing. The Bjsc will stop but remain in the player. PWV (1):Press this buttonor the S'EEK down mow to CRIPLAY: Press this button to change'to the disc: go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played.If you hold the-buttonor press it function when theradio,is on, more than once, the player will continue moving back EJECT Press'this button to remove the discor stop the through the disc. disc and switchto the radio.EJECT will work with the radio off.

3-22 Theft-Deterrent Feature 1. Write down any three or four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keepit in a safe placeseparate from THEFTLOC,K" is designed to discourage theftof your the vehicle. radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed. 2. Turn the ignitionto the ACC orRUN position. The' THEFTLOCK featurefor the radio may be usedor 3. Turn the radiooff. ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally andthe 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down radio is not protected by the feature.If THEFTLOCK is until --- shows on the display. Nextyou will use the activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. secret code number whichyou have written down. When THEFTLOCK isactivated, the radio will display 5. Press MIN and 000 will appearon the display.. LOC to indicatea locked conditionanythe battery power is removed. If your battery loses power for any 6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree reason, you must unlock the radio with the,. secret code with your code. i before it will operate. 7. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree with your code. Activatingthe Theft-Deterrent Feature . 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the The instructions which follow explain how to enter your code matches the secret code you have written down. secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is The display will showREP to let you know that you recommended that you read through all nine steps need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your before starting.theprocedure. secret code. NOTE: If you allow more than15 seconds to elapse 9. Press AM-FM and this tinie the display will show between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to SEC to let you know that your radiois secure. time apd you muststart the procedure over at Step4.

. .. ..

?' .

' .:?< .. . Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows; pauseno more than Enter your secret code as follows; pause no morethan 15 seconds between steps: 15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignition to theACCESSORY or RUN 1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. position. 2. Press MIN and 000 will appear-onthe display. 2. Turn the radio off. 3. Press MIN again tomake the last two digits agree 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down with your code. until SEC shows on the display. I 4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree 4. 'Press MIN and 0010 will appear on the display. with your ?ode. 5. Press MIN again to make'the iast two digits agree 5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmedthat the with your code. code matches the secret code you have written down.6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree The displaywill show SEC, indicating the radiois with your code. now operable and ,secure. 7.. Press after you have confirmed that the If you enter the wrongcode eight times,INOP will AM-FM code matchesthe secret codeyou have written down. appear on the display.You will have to waitan hour The display will show---, indicating that the radiois with the ignitionon before you again. When you can try no longer secured. try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code beforeINOP appears. If the code entered is incorrect,SEC will appear on the display. The radiowill remain secured until the correct 11 you lose or forgetyour code, contactyou dealer. code is entered. When battery poweris given to a secured radio, the radio won't turn on and LOC will appear on the display.

3-24 Steering Wheel Controls (Option) VOLUME: Press the up arrow to increase the If your vehiclehas this feature, you can control certain volume and the down arrow radio functions using the buttonson your steering wheel. to decrease volume. SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the downarrow to tune to the previous radio station. If a cassette tape or compact discis playing, the player will advance with the up arrow and rewind with the down arrow. PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radiois playing. MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound. PRESET Press this button to hear the radio stations that are set onyour pushbuttons. AM-FM: Press this buttonto select AM, FM1 or FM2. The band selected will showon the digital screen. The frequency will also be displayed and,if the station is in stereo, the stereo indicator will also be displayed.If a cassette tape or compact discis playing, the tape or disc will stop playing and the radio will play.

3-25 Understanding Radio eception To help avoid hearing lossor damage: Adjust the volume controlto the lowest setting. FM Stereo 0 Increase volume slowlyuntil you hear comfortably stereo will give you the best sound. But signals FM EM and clearly.' will reach only about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings 'orhills can interfere withFM signals, causing the sound to comeand go. NOTICE: AM Before you add anysound equipment to your The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, vehicle like atape player, CB'radio, mobile especially at night. The longer range, however, can -- telephone or two-way radio be sure you can cause stations to interferewith each other. AM can pick -- up noise fkom things like storms and power lines.Try add whatyou want. If you can, it's very reducing the treble to reduce this nois'eif you ever getit. important toio it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of Tips About Your Audio System your vehicle's engine, Delcoradio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle's I Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher systems may interfere with the operationof volumes of sound. Soundthat seems normal can be loud sound equipment that hasbeen added and harmful to your hearing. Take precautionsby improperly. adjusting the volume controlon your radioto a safe So, before adding sound equipment,check with sound level before your hearing adaptsit. to your dealer andbe sure tocheck Federal rules .. covering mobile radio and telephone . I.. units.

.. . 11.::. "- Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Theradio will default back to CUTTAPE DETECTION when the cleaner cassette is ejected. A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged Youmay also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean cases away from contaminants,direct sunlight and the tape head. It may not'clean as thoroughlyas the extremeheat. If theyaren't, they may notoperate scrubbing type cleaner. properly or may cause failureof the tape player. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may tape player should be clean4 regularly after every, degrade over time. Always make sure that the cassette 50 hours of use. Youi. radio may display CLN to indicate tape is in good condition before you haveyour tape that you have used your tape player for 50 hok without player serviced. resetting the tape clean timer.If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape Care of Your Compact Discs or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no Handle discs carefully. Store them in th'eir original cases improvement in sound quality, clean the tapeplayer. or otherprotective cases and away from direct sunlight , Cleaning mybe done with a scrubbing action, and dust. If the surfaceof a disc is soiled, dampen a non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution and the tape head asthe hubs of the cleaner cassetteturn. clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Follow these steps to prevent the cassette from being Be sure never td touch the signal surface when handling ejected due tothe CUT TAPE DETECTION feature: discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the

1. Turnthe radio off andthe ignition on. ' edge of thehole and the outer edge.. 2. Press and hold the TAPEPLAY buttonfor three seconds (tape indicator will flashfor two seconds). 3. ~nskrtthe cleaner cassette. Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand mostcar washes I NOTICE: without being damaged.If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, you can straightenit out by hand. If the Don’t lubricate thepower antenna. Lubrication mast is badly bent,as it might beby vandals, YOU should could damage it. replace it. Check every oncein a while to be surethe mastis still tightened to the fender. NOTICE: Power Antenna Mast Care Your power antenna will look itsbest and work wellif Before entering an automatic carwash, turn off it’s cleanedfiom time to time.To clean the antenna your radio to make thepower antenna go down. mast: This will prevent the ,mast frompossibly getting damaged. If the antennadoes not go down when 1. Turn on the ignition and radioto raise the antenna. you turn the radiooff, it may be damaged or 2. Dampen a clean cloth with’mineralspirits or need to be cleaned. In eithercase, lower the equivalent solvent. antenna by hand by carefully pressing the 3. Wipe the cloth overthe.mast sections, removingany antenna down.

dirt. ~ 4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth. If the mast portionof your antenna is damaged,you can 5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the easily replaceit. See your dealer for a replacement kit radio or ignition off and on. and follow the instructionsin the kit. 6. Repeat if necessary. NOTES NOTES

3-30 Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your Pontiac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts”in the Index.) Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roadsor freeways, it means “always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are goingto be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are aboutthe most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving.You never Here you’ll find information about driving on different know when the vehicle infront of you is going to brake kinds of roads andin varying weather conditions. We’ve or turn suddenly. also included many other useful tips on driving. ‘i 4-1 Drunken Driving The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people neverto drink alcohol and then drive. But Death andinjury associated with drinking and driving what if people do? How much is “too much” if the is a national tragedy. It’sthe number one contributor. ’ to driver plans to elrive? It’sa lot less than many might the highway deathtoll, claiming thousandsof victims think. Although it dependson each person and situation, every year. here is some general informationon the problem. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needsto drive The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)of someone a vehicle: who is drinking depends uponfour things:

Judgment 0 The amount of alcohol consumed

0 MuscularCoordination 0 The drinker’s body weight Vision The amwnt of food that is consumed beforeand Attentiveness, during drinking Police records show thatalmost half of all motor The lengthof time it has taken the drinkerto vehicle-related,deaths involve alcohol.In most cases, consume the alcohol. these deathsme the resultof someone who wasdrinking According tothe Amefican Medical Association,a and driving. h recent years, some18,000 annual motor 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a of alcohol, with morethan 300,000 people injured. BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reachthe Many adults -- by some estimates, nearlyhdf the adult same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses population -- choose neverto drink alcohol, so they of wine or three mixed drinks if each had1- 1/2 ounces never drive afterdrinking. For persons under 21, it’s (45 d)of a liquor me whiskey, gin or vodka. against the law in every W.S’. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychologicaland developmental reasons for these laws. Since alcohol is carriedin body water, this means that a woman generally will reacha higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing numberof U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limitfor all commercial drivers in the United Statesis 0.04 percent. The BAC willbe over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol in is the drinks, and how quickly the persondrinks them. But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people aie impaired ata BAC approaching It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example,if 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces drivers are impaired at BAC levels above0.05 percent. or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s Statistics show that the chanceof being in a collision BAC would beclose to0.12 percent. A personwho increases sharplyfor drivers who have a BAC of consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC levelof somewhat lower BAC level. 0.06 percent has doubledhis or her chanceof having a collision. At a BAC levelof 0.10 percent, the chance of There is a gender difluence, too. Women generallyhave this driver having a collision 12is times greater; at a a lower relative percentageof body water than men. level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 times greater!

4-3 The body takes aboutan hour to rid itselfof the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’san emergency, a need to take sudden action, as whena child darts into the street? Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. ~

A person with evena moderate BAC might not beable ~ Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and to react quickly enoughto avoid the collision. judgment canbe affected by even a small amount There’s something else about drinking and driving that of alcohol. You can have a serious-- or even many people don’t know. Medical research shows that fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking. alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries Please don’t drink and drive or ridewith a worse, especially injuries tothe brain, spinal cord or driver who has been drinking. ‘Ridehome in a heart. This means that when anyone who has been cab; or if you’re with a group, designatea driver drinking -- driver or passenger --, is in a crash, that who *.not drink. person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not beendrinking.

4-4 Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involves perception time and you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and reaction time. the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work First, you have to decide to push on the brake at the places where the tires meet the road. pedal. That’sperception time. Then you have to bring- up your footAd do it.That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average.It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesightall play a part.So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 h/h)travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lotof distance in an emergency,so keeping enough space between your vehicleand others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavementor gravel); the conditionof the road (wet,dry, icy); tire tread; and the conditionof your brakes.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. i Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive Anti-Lock Brakes in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.This Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an is a mistake.Your brakes may not havetime to cool advanced electronic braking system that will help between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much prevent a braking skid. faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace When you start your engine, or whenyou begin to drive with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, away, your anti-lock, brake systemwill check itself.You you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That may heara momentary motoror clicking noise while means better brakingand longer brake life. this test isgoing on, and you mayeven notice that your If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake brake pedal movesa little. This is normal. normally but don’t pump your brakes.If you do, the there’s a problem with the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine - If stops, youdill still have some power brake assist. But anti-lock brake system, this you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is warning light will stay on. used up,it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal See “Anti-Lock Brake will be hardertol push. System Warning Light” in ANTILOCK (a) the Index.

4-6 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could.The computer is programmed to make the mostof available tire and road conditions.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the roadis wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenlyan animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens withABS. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. separately work the brakesat each front wheel andat the rear wheels. Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t cfiange the time you need If your-vehicleis in cruise control when the traction to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease control system. beginsto limit wheelspin, the cruise. stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehiclein control will automatically disengage.When road ’ front of you, you won’t have timeto apply your brakes conditions allow you to safely useit again, you may if that vehicle suddenly slows.or stops. Always leave reengage the cruise control. (See“Cruise Control” enough room up ahead tostop, even though you have in the Index.) anti-lock brakes. Menthe systemis on, this Using Anti-Lock warning light will come on to kt you know if there’s-a Don’t pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down I problem with.your traction let anti-lock work for you. You mayfeel the system and TRACTION control system. workg, or you may notice some noise, but this is normd. OFF Traction Control System (Option) Your vehicle may havea traction con&ol system that limits wheel spin.This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that one or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning tolose traction. Whenthis happens, the See “Traction Control SystemWarning Light’’ in the system works the front brakesand reduces engine power Index. When this warning lightis on, thesystem will not to limit wheelspin. limit wheelspin. Adjust your.., ’. . driving~ i1 accordingly. --- ,.! “ A You may feel or hear the system working, butthis is normal,.

.l’ i-! . e. -...... The traction control system automatically comes on You can turn the system back on at any timeby pressing whenever you start your vehicle.To limit wheel spin, the button again. The traction control system warning especially in slippery road conditions, you should light should go off. always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you ever need(You to. Braking in Emergencies should turn the systemoff if your vehicle ever gets stuck Use your anti-lock braking system whenyou need to. in sand, mud,ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same in the Index.) time. In many emergencies, steering can helpyou more than eventhe best To turn the system off, press very braking. the TRACTION Steering CONTROL button located on the console next theto Power Steering gear shift selector. If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system.is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort. I I Magnasteer Your vehicle is equipped with GM MagnasteerTM , a steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you The traction control system warning light will comeon feel when steering.atall vehicle speeds. It provides ease and stay on. the system islimiting wheel spin when you If when parking, yet a firm, solidfeel at highway speeds. press the button, the warning light will come on-- but the system won’t turn off right away. It will waituntil there’s no longex a current need to limit wheel spin.

4-9 Steering Tips What should youdo if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want Driving on Curves it to go, and slow down. It’s important to take curvesat a reasonable speed. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are the news happen on curves. Here’s why: based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want togo slower. Experienced driver or beginner, each of isus subject to the same lawsof physics when driving on curves.The If you need to reduce your speedas you approach a traction of the tires against the road surface makes it curve, do it before you enter thecurve, while your front possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn wheels are straight ahead. the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If you’ve ever the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspied. Wait to tried to steera vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. accelerate until youare out of the curve, and then The tractionyou can get in a curve depends on the accelerate gently into the straightaway. condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at Steering in Emergencies which the curveis banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factoryou can control. There are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come overhill a and find a Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out suddenly accelerate. Both control systems-- steering and from nowhere, or a child darts outfrom between parked acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet cars and stops rightin fi-ont of you. You can avoid these the road. Unless you have traction control and the system problems by braking -- if you can stopin time. But is on, addingthe sudden acceleration can demand too sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.That’s the time for much of those places. You can lose control. evasive action-- steering aroundthe problem.

4-10 Your Pontiac canperfom very wellin emergencies like An emergency like this requires close attentionand a these. First apply your brakes. (See ‘‘Braking in quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheel at Emergencies” earlier in this section.)It is better to the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can remove as much speed as you can froma possible turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing collision. Then steer around the problem, to the or left either hand.But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and right depending on the space available. just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. , The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reasonto practice defensive ‘drivingat all timesand.wear safety belts properly.

... . 4-11 Off-Road Recovery Passing You may find sometime thatyour right wheels have The driverof a vehicle about to pass another a on dropped off the edge of a road ontothe shoulder while two-lane highway waits forjust the right moment, you’re driving. accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle aon two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can / // e- LEFT APPAOX. QUARTER TURN suddenly put thepassing driver face to face withthe worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing patterns.If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait fora better time. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea accelerator and then, if there is nothingin the way, steer hun or an intersection, delay youi pass. A broken so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. center line usually indicates it’sall right to pass You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn (providing the road aheadis clear). Nevercross a solid until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, turn your steering wheel to go straightdown the roadway. even if the road seems empty of approaching trS1c. a Do not get too close theto vehicle youwant to pass a Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and while you’re awaitingan opportunity. For one thing, start yourleft lane change signal before moving out following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, of the rightlane to pass. When youare far enough especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. ahead of the passed vehicle to seeits front in your

Also, you won’t have adequate spaceif the ’ ~ inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal

vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep and move back into the right lane. (Rememberthat .* back a reasonable distance. your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicle you a When it looks like a chance to passis coming up, just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.) start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your moveso you will be a Try not to pass more than one vehiclea timeat .- .; . . -.:-..increasing speed as the time comesto move into the on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the - 5;. : .~ ~ . ..4, I y other lane. If the way is clear to pass,you will have a next vehicle. . I %. - ..-8 - ..-“running start” that more than makes up for the . > .- a Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. distance-you would lose by dropping back. Andif Even though the brake lampsare not flashing,it may something happens to cause youto cancel your pass, be slowing down or starting to you need only slow down and drop back again and turn. wait for another opportunity. a If you’re being passed, makeit easy for the a following driver to get aheadof you. Perhaps you If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait can ease alittle to the right. your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. Loss of Control If you do not have traction control, or if the systemis off, then an acceleration skid isalso best handled by Let’s review what driving experts say about what easing your footoff the accelerator pedal. happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your footoff the tires meet the road todo what the driver has asked. accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your In any emergency, don’t give up. Keeptrying to steer and vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a constantly seekan escape route or area of less danger. second skid if it occurs. Skidding Of course, tractioni,s reduced when water,snow, ice, gravel or other materialis on the road.For safety, you’ll In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. want to slow down and adjust your driving to these Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery care suited to existing conditions, andby not surfaces because stopping distance willbe longer and are always “overdriving” those conditions. But skids vehicle control more limited. possible. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try The three typesof skids correspond to your Pontiac’s your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or three control systems.In the braking skid, your wh’eels braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower aren’t rolling.In the steering or cornering skid, too gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip andslide. You may not realize the surfaceis slippery until lose cornering force. Andin the acceleration ‘skid, too your vehicleis skidding. Learnto recognize warning much throttIe causes the driving wheelsto spin. clues -- such as enough water,ice or packed snow on A cornering skidis best handled by easing your foot off the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow the accelerator pedal. down when you have any doubt. If you have the traction control system, remember: It Remember: Any anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps helps avoid only the acceleration skid. avoid onlythe braking skid.

4-14 Driving at Night Here are some tips on nightdnving. 0 Drivedefensively. Don’t drink and drive. Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the gl&e from headlamps behind you.

0 Since you can’t see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

0 Slow down, especiallyon higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.

0 In remote areas, watch for animals. If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

Night driving is more dangerousthan day driving. One reason is that some driversare likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or chugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Night Vision Keep you windshield and all the glasson your vehicle clean - inside and out. Glare at nightis made much No one c8n see as well at nightas in the-daytime.But as worse by dirt on the glass. Even the insideof the glass we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old can build up a film caused by dust.Dirty glass makes driver may require at least twiceas much lightto see the lights dazzleand flash more than clean glass would, same thing at night as a 20-year-old. making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly. What you do in the daytimecan also afTect your night Remember that your headlamps lightup farless of a vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright roadway when you arein a turn or curve. Keep your sunshine you are wiseto wear sunglasses.Your eyes will eyes moving; that way, it's easierto pick out dimly have less trouble adNstingto night. But if you're lighted objects.Just as your headlamps should be driving, don't wear sunglasses at night. They may cut checked regularly for properaim, so should youreyes down on.glare from headlamps, but they also. make a lot be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night of things invisible. blindness -- the inability to see in dim light - and . Youcan betemporarily blinddby approaching.aren't even aware of it. headlamps. It can takea second or two, or even several seconds, foryour eyes to readjust to the dark. when you are facedwith severe glare(as fkom a driver who doesn't lower the high beams, or a vehicle with mished ' headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain andwet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turnas well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as goodas on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wiseto go slower and be cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving.The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving ondry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harderit is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper bladesare in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, theedge of the roadand even people walking. It’s wise to keepyour wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when theyshow signs of streaking or missing areason the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.’

4-17 .Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to ‘one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving througha large puddleof water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes, Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

4-18 Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actuallyride on the water. This can happenif the roadis wet enough and you’re NOTICE: ~~~~~~~~ going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. Butit can if your engine’s air intake and badly damage your I tires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one or more islow. It can happenif a lotof water is standing on engine. Never drive through water that is slightly the road.If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning. through them very slowly. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The some Other Ralg Weather Tips best adviceis to slow down whenit is raining. Turn on your low-beam headlamps-- not just your parking lamps-- to help makeyou more visible to others. Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)

4-19 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of trafficon them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals. Here are.ways to increase your safetyin city driving: 0 Know the best way to get to where youare going. Get a city map and plan yourtrip.into an unknown part of the cityjust as you would for across-countq trip. Try to use the freeways thatrim and crisscross most large cities.You’ll save timeand energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) a Treat a green light as a warning signd A traftic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light huns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

4-20 Freeway Driving At the entrance, there is usually a rarnp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear viewof the freewayas you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge intothe gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on yourturn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with th’e traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedthe to posted limit or to the prevailing rateif it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehiclein your “blind” spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certaih you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move’ Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,slightly slower at night. expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. When you wantto leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do.not, The most important adviceon freeway driving is:Keep’ under any circumstances, stop and backup. Drive on tu up with traffic and keepto the right. Drive at the same the next exit. speed mostof the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit rarnpcan be curved, sometimes quite sharply. left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. 4-21 The exit speedis usually posted. Here are somethings you can check before a trip:

Reduce your speed according your to speedometer, not 0 Windshield WasherFluid: Is the reservoir full? to your senseof motion. After drivingfor any distance Are all windows clean inside and outside? at higher speeds, you may tendto think you are going 0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? slower thanyou actually are. Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked Before Leaving on a Long Trip all levels? Make sure you’re ready.Try to be well rested. If you 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses dean? . must start when you’re notfresh -- such as aftera day’s 0 They are vitallyirnportmt to a safe, work -- don’t plan to maketoo many miles that first part Tires: trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor of the journey. We,ar comfortable clothing andshoes you can easily drive in. long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure? Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip?If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready go. to If it needs 0 Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your you trip a service, haveit done before starting out.Of course, route? Should delay your short you’ll find experiencedand able service expertsin time to avoid a major storm system? Pontiac dealersall across North America. They’ll be Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? ready and willing tohelp,if you need it. Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?Call it highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’tit lethappen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leavethe road h Zess than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First, be aware thatit can happen. Then here are some tips: 0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. a Keep your eyes moving.Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your Driving on steephills or mountainsis different from instruments frequently. driving inflat or ,rolling terrain. 0 If you get sleepy, pull offthe road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness theon highway as an emergency. ~fyou drive regularlyin steep country,or if you’re planning to visit there, hereare some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable. Keep you vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the also the brakes, tires, transaxle. and cooling system and ignition off is dangerous. Yourbrakes will have to These partscan work hard on mountain roads. do all the work of slowing down. They could getso 0 Know how to go down hills. The most important hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the have pmbraking or even none going downa hill. slowing down. Shift toa lower gear when yougo 1 You could crash. Always have your engine running down a steepor long hill. ~ and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

Know how to go uphill. Shift down to THIRD (3). This will helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb thehill better. If ‘you don’tshift down, your brakes could getso hot that they wouldn’f work well. You would then 0 Stay in your own hewhen drivingon two-lane roads inhills or mountains. Don’tswing wide or cut have poor braking or even none going down a hill. across the center of the road. Drive at speeds thatlet You could crash. Shift down to let your engine you stay in your own lane. assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope. 0 As you go over the top of a hill, be dert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of specid ‘problems. Examplesare long grades, passing or

:I’ no-passing zones, a fallingrwkx area or winding ,:\. .. roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Winter Driving

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer Here are some tips for winter driving: clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth anda couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will Have your Pontiac in good shape for winter. be driving under severe conditions, include .a small bag You may want to put winter emergency suppliesin of sand, a pieceof old carpetor a couple of burlap hgs your trunk. to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-25 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably havegood traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tiresand,, the road, you can havea very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip”and will need to be very careful.

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or icecan be slick and hard to driveon. But wet ice can be even more trouble becauseit may offer the least tractionof all. You can get wet icewhen it’s about freezing (32°F; O°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until saltand sand crews can get there.

4-26 Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability or loose snow -- drive with caution. when you makea hard stop on a slippery road. Even If you have traction control, keep the systemIt on. will though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll ipprove your ability to accelerate when drivingon a want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would ondry slippery road. Even though your vehicle. has a traction pavement. See “Anti-Lock’’in the Index. control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust 0 Allow greater following distanceon any slippery your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction road. Control System” in the Index. 0 Watch for slippery spots.The road might be fine If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerate until you hit a spot that’s coveredwith ice. On an gently. Try not to break thefragile traction. If you otherwise clear road, ice patches may appearin accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and polish shaded areas where thesun can’t reach: around the surface under the tires even more. clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear.If you see a patchof ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actuallyon the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

. . . . .I. . . 4-27 P If You’re Caught in a Blizzard 0 Tie a red cloth to yourvehcle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by thesnow. 0 Put on extra clothing or wrapa blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm..

If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a serious situation.You should probably staywith your vehicle unless youknow for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow, Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

0 Turn on your hazard flashers. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-28 _I . -- 1. <. i - . Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves CAUTION: fuel. When you run the engine, makeit go a little faster A than just idle. Thatis, push the accelerator slightly.This uses lessfuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to This can causedeadly CO (carbon monoxide)'gas restart the vehicle,and possibly for signaling later OIZ to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill with your headlamps. Let the heater runfor awhile. you. Youxan't see it or smell it, so you might not Then, shut the engineoff and close thewindow almost ~QWit is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again around the baseof your vehicle, especiallyany and repeatthis only when youfeel really uncomfortable that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check from the cold. But do itlittle as as possible. Preserve the around again fromtime to time to be sure snow fuel as long as you can.To help keep warm, you can get doesn't collect there. out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorousexercises Open a window just a little on the sideof the every half houror so until help comes. vehicle that's away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

4-29

a. . Loading Your Vehicle MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP TIRE-LOADING IiNFORMATlON DATE GYWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR '@IOCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP. WT. FRT. CTR. RR. TOTAL LBS. KG THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI- MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE CABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE CAPAC,lTY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION TIRE SIZE SPEED PRESSURE STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF RTG PSI/KPa MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. FRT. RR. SPA. IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The other labelis the Certification label, found on the rear edge of the driver's door.It tellsyou the gross weight Wolabels on your vehicle show how much weight it capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weightof the found on the rear edgeof the driver's door tells you the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating pressures for the tires on your vehicle.It also gives you (GAWR) for eitherthe fi-ont or rear axle. important information about the numberof people that And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can out. Don't cqmore than 176 lbs: (80 in your h-unk. carry. This weight is called theVehicle Capacity Weight kg) and includes 'the weightof all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Things you put inside your vehicle can strike GVVVR, or either the maximum front or rear and injurepeople in a sudden stopor turn, or in GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, a crash. or itcan change theway your vehicle handles. Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a These could cause youto lose control. Also, trunk, putthem as far forward as you can. overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the topsof the seats. NOTICE: Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. Your warranty does not cover parts or When you carry something inside the components that fail because of overloading. vehicle, secure it whenever you can. I Don't leave a seat fold'ed down unless you If you put things inside your vehicle-- like suitcases? need to. tools, packagesor anything else -- they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is acrash, they'll keep going. Electronic Level Control (Option) This feature keeps the rearof your'vehide level asthe load changes.It is automatic -- you do not need to adjust anything. Towing a Trailer Do not tow a trailer if your vehicleis equipped with the SSE package. Your vehicle cantow a trailer if it is equipped with the SE package and proper trailertowing equipment. To identify what’thevehicle ‘trailering capacityis for your If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive vehicle, you should read the informationi.i “Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section. But properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailehg is differentthan just driving your vehicleby &der. For example, if the trder is too,heavy, the itself. Trailering means changesin handling;durability, brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You and and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes your passengers could be’seriously injured. Pull a correct equipment, andit has to be used properly. trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your Pontiac dealerfor advice and That’s the reason forthis part. In it are many time-tested, important traileringtips and safety rules. information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers.So please read this section carefially before you pull a trailer. Load-pulling_componentssuch as the engine, transaxle, ’ I NOTICE: ~ wheel assembliesand tires are forcedto work harder Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your against the drag of the added weight. The engineis vehicle and result incostly repairs notcovered by required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generatkig extra heat, What’smore, the your warranty. To pull trailer correctly, follow a trailer adds considerably windto resistance, increasing the advice in thispart, andsee your Pontiac the pulling requirements, - dealer- forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with your vehicle.

4-32 ‘ .. If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer Weight of the Trailer If you do, hereare some important points: How heavy can a trailer safely be? 0 There are many different laws, including speed limit It should never weigh more than1,000 lbs. (450 kg). But restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure even that canbe too heavy. your rig will be legal, not only whereyou.live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this It depends on how you plan to use rig.your For information can be state or provincial police. example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicleused is to pull,a 0 Consider using a sway control.You can ask a hitch trailer are all important. And,it can also dependon any dealer about sway controls. special equipment that you have your on vehicle. 0 Don’t tow a trailer atall during thefirst 1,000 miles You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or (1 600 h)your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, advice, oryou can write us at: axle or other parts could be damaged. Customer Assistance Center Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow Pontiac Division a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t One Pontiac. Plaza make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. In ‘Canada, write to: 0 Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. Don’t drivefaster than the maximum posted speed General Motorsof Canada Limited for trailers (or no more than55 mph (90 km/h)) to Customer Assistance Center save wear on your vehicle’s parts. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, OntarioL1H 8P7 Three important considerations have doto with weight:

the weighttrailer, of the = .\, the weight of the trailer tongue .hi. .+. ,. .. . d ,and the total weighton your vehicle’s tires. -’ Y Weight of the Trailer Tongue If you’re usinga “dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10%of the total loadedtrailer weight The tongue load(A) of any trailer’is an important (B). If you have a “weight-distributing” hitch, thetrailer weight to measure becauseit affects the total capacity tongue (A) should weigh 1.2%of the total loaded trailer weight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes theweight (B). curb weight of the vehicle,my cargo you may carryin it, and the peoplewho will%eriding in the vehicle.And After you’ve loaded your trailer, weighthe trailer and if you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue then the tongue, separately, to seeif the weightsare load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your proper. If they aren’t, you may beable to get them right vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loadingsimply by moving some items around in the trailer. Your Vehicle” in the Index formore information. about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. Total Weight on.YourVehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires -are inflated to the recommended pressurefor-cold tires. You’ll find these numbers ~ltlthe Certification label at the rearedge of the drivel’s door or see “Loading.Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be sure you don’tgo over theGVW limit for your vehicle, including the weightof the trailer tongue.

A

4-34 Hitches Safety Chains It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. You should always attach chains between your vehicle Crosswinds, large trucks goingby and rough roadsare a and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare of the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to theroad some rules to follow: if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch. Instructions 0 Will you have to make any holes in the body of your about safety chains may be provided by the hitch . vehicle when you hstall a trailer hitch?If you do, manufacturer or by the trgler manufacturer. Follow the then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove manufacturer’s recommendationfor attaching safety the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig. vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” thein Index). Dirt And, never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground. (_,.,.. !. ‘I.. and water can, too. ,)-*: 5 , .>:. 1 Trailer Brakes . -. ., a The bumperson your vehicle are not intendedfor L,. t ., hitches. not attach rental hitches other Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to Do or read follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakes bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a and so you’ll be able to install, adjust maintain frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to and the bumper. them properly. Because you have anti-lock brakes, do trynot to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well,or at all. Driving with a nailer Following Distance Towing a trailer requires a certain amountof experience. Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle aheadas you Before seffing out for the open road, you’ll want to get would when driving yourvehicle without a trailer. This to know your rig, Acquaint yourself with the feelof can helpyou avoid situationsthat require heavy braking handling and braking with the added weightof the and suddentuns. trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle youare driving isnow a gooddeal longer and not nearlyas Passing responsive as yourvehicle is by itself. You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when Before you start, checkthe trailer hitch and platform yuu’re, towing a trailer.And, because you’re a good deal (and attachments), safety chains, elec.ical connector, longer, you’ll needto go much farther beyond the lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has passed vehicle before youcan return to your lane. electric brakes,start your vehicleand trailer movingand then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure‘ Backing Up the brakes are working.This lets you check your Hold thebottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. electrical connectionat the same time. Then, to move the trailer to theleft, just move that hand During your trip, check occasionally be to, sure that the to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your load is secure, and that the lampsand any trailer brakes hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if are still working. possible, have someone guideyou. I

I :

4-36 Making Turns When towing a trailer, the green arrowson your instrument panel will flashfor turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out.Thus, you may think drivers NOTICE: behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer Making very sharp turns while traileringcould bulbs are still working. cause the trailer to comein contact with the Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. Whenyou’plug vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid a trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting making very sharp turns while trailering. system, its bulb warning lights may not let know you if one of your lamps goes out.So, when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in, be sureto check your When you’re turning witha trailer, make widerturns than vehicle and trailer lampsfrom time to time to be sure normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, they’re all working. Onceyou disconnect the trailer curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerkyor lamps, the bulb warning lights again canyou tell if one sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance. ‘ of ypur vehicle lamps is out.

.Turn ,SignalsWhen Towinga Trailer’ Driving On Grades When you towa trailer, your vehicle may need a Reduce speed andshift to a lower gearbefore you start different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’tshift with your Pontiac dealer.The green arrows on your down, you might have to use your brakesso much that instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn they. would gethot and no longer work well. or lane change. Properly hooked up,’ the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,On a longuphill grade, shift down to Dm(D) and change lanes or stop. reduce your speed to around45 mph (70 km/h)to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

4-37 Parking on Hills ~ When You Are Ready to Leave After You really should not park your vehicle, witha trailer Parking on a Hill attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, yourrig 1. Apply your regularbrakes and hold the pedal could start to move. People can be injured,and both .down while you: your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged. Start your engine; But if you ever haveto park your rigon a hill, here’s how to do it: e Shift into a gear; and 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’tshift into Release the parking brake. PARK (P) yet. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. Drive slowlyuntil the trailer is clear of the chocks. 3. When the wheel chocksare in place, release the 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. regular brakesmil the chocks absorb the load. Maintenance When Trailer Towing 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourpa;rking brake, and then shift toPdRK (P). Your vehicle will & service more often when you’re pmga trde~See the Mainte~nanceSchedule for more ’ 5. Releasethe regular brakes. on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are .automatictrande fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is-coveredin this manual, and the Index will help you kdthem quickly. If you’re tradering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before youstart your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nutsand bolts are tight.

4-38 Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that Your hazard warning flashers letyou warn others. They can occur on the road. also let police knowyou have a problem.Your front and Hazard Warning Flashers rear turn signal lamps willflash on and off. Press the buttonin to make your front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warningflashers work no matter what position yourkey is in, and even if the key isn’tin.

5-1 To turn off the flashers, I pull out on the collar. CAL SION: When the hazard w;?ming flashers areon, your turn Batteries can hurtyou. They can be dangerous signals won't work. because: 0 They contain ,acidthat can burnyou. 0 They contain gas that canexplode or ignite. They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you don't follow these stepsexactly, some or all of these things can hurtyou. Other Warning Devices .% If you carry reflectivetriangles, you can set one up at &e side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. NOTICE: Jump Starting Remember that ignoringthese stepscould result If your battery has run down,you may want to use in costly damage to yourvehicle that wouldn't be another vehicleand some jumpercables to start your covered by your warranty. Pontiac. Butplease follow the steps belowto do it safely. Trying to start your Pontiac by pushing or

~ pulling it won't work, and it could dam'age your vehicle.

5-2 1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative groundsystem. NOTICE:

If you leave your radioon, it could be badly NOTICE: damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. 2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching- each other. If they are, it could causea ground connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t be ableto

start your Pontiac, and the bad grounding could An electric fan can start ~ even wl 3 the engine damage the electrical systems. is not running and can injureyou. Keep hands, You could be injuredif the vehicles roll. Set the clothing and tools away from any underhood parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Putan electric fan. automatic transaxlein PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL (N). 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. Turnoff all lamps that aren’t needed as well

I as radios. This will avoidsparks and help saveboth batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!

5-3 5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. 6. Check that the jumper cables don’t haveloose or Using a match near a battery can cause battery missing insulation. If they do, you could geta shock. gas to exp1ode:People have been hurt doing this, The vehicles could be damaged, too. and some have been blinded. Use a flashlightif Before you connect the cables, hereare some basic you need more light. things you should know. Positive (+) will go to Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal enginepart. Don’t connect positive(+)’ to need to add water to theDeko Freedom@ battery negative (-) or you’llget a short that would damage installed in every new GM vehicle, But if a battery the battery and maybe otherparts, too. has filler caps, be sure the right mount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to takecare of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present. A CAUTION: I . Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you, Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in Fans or other moving engmem parts can injureyon your eyes or on your skin, flush theplace with badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts water and get medical help immediately. once the engines are running.

5-4 8. Don't let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terrninal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Connect the red positive(+) cable to the positive(+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote Positive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. 9. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) terminal.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other endof the negative cabledoesn’t go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy unpainted metalpart 10. Attach the cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away on the engine of the vehiclewith the dead battery. from the dead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connectionis just as good there, butthe chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 11. Now start the vehiclewith the good battery and run the enginefor a while. 12. Try to start the vehicle with thedead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

5-6 I. ‘ e.;::I ; -.‘w .I , . .- > ;. ;. I .. 13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent ’ Towing Your Vehicle .- electrical shorting.Take care that they don’t touch each otheror any other metal.

A

B

I

A. Heavy Metal Engine Part Try to have a Pontiac dealer or a professional towing B. Good Battery service tow your Bonneville. See “Roadside Assistance” C. Dead Battery in the Index. If your vehicle has been changed or modified sinceit was factory-new by adding aftermarket items likefog lamps, aeroskirting, or special tiresand wheels, these instructions and illustrations may not be correct.

- . 5-7 Before you do'anything,turn on the hazard waning flashers. When you cdl, tell the towing service: That, if you have theSSE model, your vehicle cannot be towed from the front with sling-type equipment.

0 That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.

0 The make, model and yearof your vehicle. 0 Whether you can still move theshift lever. If there was an accident, what was damaged. When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know that this manual contains detailed towing instructions and illustrations. The operatormay want to see them To help avoid injury to you or others: Never let passengers ride ina vehicle that is being towed. Never tow faster thansafe or posted speeds. Never tow with damaged parts not

..,.'y fully secured. 0 Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by'the tow truck. 0 Always secure thevehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it. Never we J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.

5-8 When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key turned to theOFF position. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, witha clamping device designedfor towing service.Do not use the A vehicle can fall froma car carSier if it isn’t vehicle’s steeriqg. columnlock for this. The transaxle adequately secured. This cancause a collision, should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking serious personalinjury andvehicle damage. The brake released. vehicle should be tightly secured with chainsor Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels, steel cables before it is transported. unless you must. If the vehicle mustbe towed onthe Don’t usesubstitutes (ropes, leather straps, drive wheels,be sure to follow the speed anddistance. canvas webbing, qtc.) that can be cut by sharp restrictions laterin this section or your transaxle will be edges underneath thetowed vehicle. Always use damaged. If these limits must be exceeded, then the T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use drive wheels have to be supportedon a dolly. J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and suspension components.

5-9 Front Towing (SSE and SSEi Only) NOTICE:

Do not tow with slmg-type equipment or fascidfog lamp damagewill occur. Usewheel-lift or car carrieF equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car carrierequipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps. Towing a vehicle overrough surfacescould damage a vehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise vehicle until adequate clearanceis obtained between the ground and/orwheel-lift equipment. Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to suspension components when using car carrier equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the T-hook slots.

I

I

5-10 Attach T-hook chains on both sidesin the slotted holesin the bottom of the cradle, behind the front wheels.

These slots are tobe used when loading and securingto car carrier equipment.

Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of each lower controlarm. Front Towing (SE) Attach T-hook chains on both sides in the slotted holes in the bottom of the cradle, b’ehindthe front wheds.

These slots &eto be used when usingslingtype equipment or when’loading and securing to car carrier equipment.

Position a 4” x 4” wood beam acrosssling chains contacting bottomof the radiator support. Position the lower sling crossbar directly under the front bumper.

5-12 Rear Towing Tow Limits -- 55 mph (88 kmlh), 500 miles (800 km) Attach T-hook chains to slots in the bottomof the floor pan directly aheadof rear wheels on both sides.

No 4" x 4" wood beam is needed.

Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end.. of each controlarm. Position the lower sling crossbar directlybehind and at Attach a separate safety chainaround the outboard end lower edgeof rear bumper cover. of each lowercontrol arm.

5-14 Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage or the warning light about a hot engineon your Pontiac’s instrument panel. See “Coolant Temperature Gage” and “Coolant Steam froman overheated engine can burnyou Temperature Warning Light” in the Index. badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay away If Steam Coming from theengine if you see or hearsteam coming Is From Your Engine from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam or coolant before opening the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catchfire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. I

I NOTICE: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

5-15 If No Steam ]Is Coming From Your Engine If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can driv'e. Just to besafe, drive slower for about10 minutes. If you get the overheat warning but orsee hear no If the warning doesn't come back on, youcan steam, the problem may not too be serious. Sometimes driv'e normally. the engine can geta little too hotwhen you: If the warning continues, pull over, stop,and park your Climb a long hill on a hot day. vehicle rightaway. 0 Stop af'ter high-speed driving. If there's still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine Idle for long periodsin traffic. for'two or three minutes whileyou're parked, to see if the warningstops. But then,if you still have the 0 Tow a trailer. warning, turn oJjcthe engine and get everyone out of If you get the overheat warning with no sign of stem, the vehicle until it cools down. try this for a minute orso: You may decide notto lift thehood but to get service 1. Turn off your air conditioner. help rightaway. 2. Turn on,your heater tofull hot at the 'highest fan speed and open thewindow as necessary. 3. If you're in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift tothe highest gear while driving -- AUTUMbaTz[c OVERDRIVE (@) or DRIVE (D).

5-16 Cooling System When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what you'll see: An electric fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. C If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tankis boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. .

A. Coolant recovery tank B. Radiator pressure cap C. Electric engine fans

5-17 , A CAWTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, canbe very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Don’t mn the engine if there is a leak. If you run ’ the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive thevehicle.

‘The coolant level should beor at above the FULL I NOTICE:

% COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the . radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or Engine damage fromrunning your engine somewhere else in the cooling system. I without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. I If there seemsto be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric enginefans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should berunning. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service. How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Recovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolantlevel -coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning isn’t at theFULL COLD mark, add-a50/50 mixture of system is set for the proper coolantmix. With clean water (preferably distilled) andDEX-COOL TM plain wateror the wrong mix, your engine could (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolarit” in the Indexfor warning. Your enginecould catch fire andyou or more information.) others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean

water andDEX-COOL TM antifreeze.

Adding only plain water to yourcooning system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other NOTICE: liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the CAUTION: (Continued) engine, radiator, heater coreand other parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mix. If the overheatwarning continues, there's one more thing you cantry. You can add the proper coolantmix dire'ctlyto the radiator, but b'e sure the coolingsystem is cool before you do it.

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap-- even a little -- they can come out at high speed, Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, including theradiator pressure I cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and CAUTION: radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto I A turn the pressurecap. You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and itwill burn if the engine parts arehot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolantin the coolant recovery tankis at the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

5-20 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose,is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear ahiss, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push 3. Fill the radiator with the propermix, up to the base down as you turn it. Removethe pressure cap. of the filler neck. 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL 6. Start the engine and let it mn until you can feel the COLD mark. upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the 5. Put the capback on the coolant recoverytank, but engine fans. leave the radiator pressure capoff. 7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add ' more of the propermix through the filler neck until the level reaches the baseof the filler neck. 5-24 Air Inflator System A CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, andyou or others could be injured. Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure.

Some vehicles have an air inflator for use in maintaining proper air pressure for the tires. The air inflator is located in the trunk. The ON switch willwork only with the ignition on.

5-25 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoidfwther tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place,Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

A CAUTION:

Changing atire cancause an injury. Thevehicle can slipoff the jackand roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. -Find alevel place to changeyour tire. To help prevent thevehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brakefirmly. 2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). 3. lbrn off the engine. The following stepswill tell you how to use thejack and To b'e evenmore certain thevehicle won't move, c;lhange a tire. you can putblocks at. the front and rearof the tire farthest away from theone being changed. That would be the tireon the other sideof the vehicle, at theopposite end. Removing the Spare Tire andTools Open the box that stores thejack and The equipment you’ll ,need wheel wrenchand then is in the trunk. Pull the twist the wing bolt camethg. ‘from thefloor of one-quarter turn theku&. Turn the center counterclockwise. retainer bolton the spare tire cover counterclockwise to remove it.

Lift and remove the cover.See “Compact Spare Tire” Remove thejack and wheel wrench. later in this section for moreinformation about the compact spare. Remove the spare tire fromthe trunk. Removing Wheel Covers and Wheel NI*Caps To remove the wheel or nut cap covers for your particular vehicle,if you have steel wheels withfull plastic wheel covers, loosen each nut cap using the wheel wrench.

Please note that nut caps will not rmove from the The tools you’ll be using include thejack (A) and wheel wrench (6). cover completely. If you have aluminum Removing the Flat Tire and Installing wheels with nut caps, the Spare Tire remove them.,

If your have aluminum wheels and the center cover hides the wheel nuts, remove the center coverby using the flat end of the wrench to pry it off. Do not drop the cover or lay it face down, as it could become scratched or damaged. Do not use a hammer or mallet on this typeof cover. 1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts, but don't remove them.

5-29 2. Attach the wheel wrenchto the jack, and rotate the ' wrench clockwise to raise the jack ahead few inches. Near each wheel wellis a notch in the frame into which to put thejack head. The front notchis 3. Position thejack and raise, thejack head untilit fits 10 inches (25 cm) backfrom the front wheelwell. firmly on the ridgein the vehicle'sframe nearest the The rear notchis 8 inches (20 cm) forward from the flat tire.Do not raise the vehicle yet.Put the compact rear wheel well. spare tire nearyou.

I

' !.. Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked upis dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

NOTICE:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow 4. Raise the vehicleby rotating the wheel wrench the vehicle to falloff the jack.Be sure to fit the clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehiclefar enough jack lift head into the properlocation before off the groundso there is enough roomfor the spare raising yourvehicle. tire to fit. S. Remove all the wheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.

5.-31 I 1r= U. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, CAUTION: mounting surfaces and /r\ spare wheel. Rust or dirton the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel could come off and causean accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places the where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,if you need to, to get all therust or dirt off.

CAUTION: I A a Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts mightcome loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. .... I

,

: ,. -. 7. Replace the wheel nuts with rounded endof the nuts towardthe wheel. Make sure each wheel stud is centered in each wheel Eole while tightening the nuts. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

8. Lower the vehicleby rotating the wheel wrench counterclockwise on the jack. Lower the jack completely. 9. Tighten the wheel nuts firqly in a ' , NOTICE: criss-cross sequence. Improperly tightened.wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation 'and .rotordamage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

Don't try to put the wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It won't fit. Store the wheel Cover in the trunlr until you have replaced the compact spare tire with a regular tire.

Incorrect wheel nuts orimproperly tightened I NOTICE: wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to am accident. Wheel covers won't fit on your compactspare. If Be sure to use the correctwheel nuts. If you have you try to put.a wheel cover on your compact to replacethem, be sure to get new GM original spare, you could damage the cover or thespare. equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as as can and soon you have the When you reinstall the full size wheel and tire, you nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 b-ft install the wheel cover or nut caps at this point. ' (140 N-m). When re-installing the When re-installing the full plastic wheel cover, decorative nut caps on align the valve stem aluminum wheels, symbol (which is tighten the caps molded into the back snug with the wheel side of the cover) with wrench. the valve stem.

Start the nut cap by pushingit onto thelugnut with the .' Then continue. tightening one-quarterturn for plastic ::-,.,-8:-' . ,' r

' ' I wheel wrench. Tighten the plastic caps snug using the caps,or one-eighth turn forsteel caps. Do not .,:\~.:, .&>. ' wheel wrench.Then, continue tightening one-quarter overtighten. When re-installing. the center cover, do not turn. Do not overtighten. use a hammer or mallet, as they coulddamage the,cover.

5-35 Storing theFlat Tire and Tools

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. Ina sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

After you’ve put thecompact spare tireon your vehicle, you’ll needto store the flattire in your trunk. Use the following procedureto secure theflat tire in the trunk. Store the flat tireas far forward in the trunk as possible. Store the jack and wheel wrenchin their box in the trunk on the passenger’s side.

5-36 , Storing the SpareTire and Tools

5 3

Storing a jack, a tireor other equipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could 4 cause injury. Ina sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. 2‘ 1 The compact spareis for temporary useonly. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you can. See “Compact SpareTire” later in this section. See 1. Jack the storing instructions label to replace your compact 2. Wheel Wrench spare into your trunk properly. 3. Wing Bolt 4. Tire 5. Cover 6. Bolt

5-37 Compact Spare Tire Although the compactspare tire was frilly inflated when NOTICE: your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be.60 psi Whpn the compact spare is installed, don’t take (420 Wa). your vehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. The compact spare canget caught on After installing the compact sparecan your vehicle, you the rails. That can damage the tire wheel,and should stop as soon as possible and make yoursure and maybe otherparts spare tireis correctly inflated.The compact spareis of your vehicle. made toperfom well at posted speedlimits for distances upto 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so YOU can Don’t use your compact spareon other vehicles. f~shyour trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced whereyou want. Of course, it’s best to replace And don’t mix your compact spare tireor wheel with your spare with a full-size tireas soon as you can. Your other wheels or tires.They won’t fit. Keep your spare spare will last longer and bein good shape in case you tire and its wheel together. need itagain. NOTICE:

Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.Using them can damage yourvehicle and can damage the chainstoo. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare. If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow NOTICE: What you don’t want to do when your vehicleis stuck is Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your to spin your wheels too fast.The method known as vehicle as well as thetires. If you spin thewheels “rocking” canhelp you get out when you’re stuck, but too fast while shifting your transaxle back and you must use caution. forth, you can destroy your transaxle. I For information about using tire chainson your vehicle, see “Tire Chains”in the Index. If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can Rocking your vehicle to get ‘it out: explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, First, turn your steering wheelleft and right. Thatwill the transaxleor other partsof the vehicle can clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle overheat. ,That could cause an engine has traction control,you should turn the systemoff. (See compartment fireor otherdamage. When you’re “Traction Control System”in the Index.) Then shift stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 kmlh) as shown gear, spinningthe wheels as little as possible. Release on the speedometer. the accelerator pedal while you shift,and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxleis in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do needto be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index. NOTES --* - , .-.

\

. . ., .- . Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find mformation about the care of your Doing Your Own Service Work Pontiac. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluidIf you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll and lubricant levels. There isalso technical information want to get the proper Pontiac Service Manual. It tells about your vehicle, anda part devoted to its appearance care.you much more about how to service your Pontiacthan this manual can.To order the proper service manual, see Service “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. Your Pontiac dealer knows yourvehicle best and wants Your vehicle has anair bag system. Before attempting to you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your do your own service work,see “Servicing Your Air dealer for all your service needs. You’llget genuine GM Bag-Equipped Pontiac”in the Index. parts and G.M-trained and supported service people. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicle all GM. list the mileage and the dateof any service work you Genuine GM parts have oneof these marks: perform. See “Maintenance Record” thein Index.

r-

6-1 If you don’t have the 3.8L supercharged Code 1 engine, use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. If you have the 3.8L supercharged, Code1 ehgine, use You can be injured and your vepicle could be premium unleaded gasoline rated 9at 1 octane or higher. damaged if‘ you try to do servicework on a At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet vehicle without knowing enough aboutit. specifications ASTM I34814 in the United States Be sure you have sufficient .knowledge, and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Can& Improved gasoline experience, and the proper replacement specifications have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association(AAMA) for parts and tools before you attempt any better vehicle performance and ehgine protection. vehicle maintenance task. Gasolims meeting theAAMA specification could Be sare to use the proper nuts, bolts and provide improved driveability and emission control other fasteners. %nglishs’and “metric” system protkction compared to other gasolines. fasteners can be easily confhsed.you use If Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least91 the wrong fasteners,parts can laterbreak ‘ (at least 89 for middle grade and87 for regular),I€ the or fall off. You could be hurt. ,. octane isless than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad-enough,it can damage .. your engine. b ’ .’. Fuel ‘ _.... ,. -- . ’Y i, If you have the3.8L supercharged Code 1 engine, in an -The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number .. I emergency, you may be able to usea lower octane -- as (VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You ,will low as 87 -- if heavy knocking does notoccur. you find the VIN at the top leftof your instrument panel. If are using 91 or higher octane unleaded gasolineand you (See “Vehicle Identification Number”m the Index.) still hear heavy knocking, YQW engine needs service.

/ If you’re usingfuel rated atthe recommended octaneor To provide cleaner air, all gasolines are now requiredto higher and youstiil hear heavy knocking, your engine contain additives that will help prevent deposits from needs service. But don’t worryif you hear a little forming in your engine andfuel system, allowing your pinging noise when you’re acceleratingor driving upa emission control system to function properly. Therefore, hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher you should not have to add anythingto the fuel. In octane fuel to get ridof pinging. It’s the heavy, constant addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, suchas knock that meansyou have a problem. ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area tohelp clean theair. General If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Motors recommends that you use these gasolinesif Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up ’label), they mcomply with the specifications described earlier. it is designed to operate fuelson that meet California specifications. If such fuelsare not availablein states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle NOTICE: will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be eected. The malfunction indicator lamp on Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that your instrument panel may turn on and/or-your vehicle contains methanol. Don’t useit. It can corrode may fail a smog-check test.If this occurs, return to your metal parts in your fuel system andalso damage authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the plastic and rubber parts. That damagewouldn’t cause of failure. In the eventit is determined that the be covered under your warranty. cause of the condition is the typeof fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such fuels, your , emission control system performance may deteriorate and the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, return to your authorized Pontiac dealerfor service. Fuels in Foreign Countries Fuel Door Lock (Option) If you plan on driving in another country outside the On a model equipped with the theft-deterrentsystem, United Statesor Canada, the properfuel may be hard to the fueldpor is locked and unlocked together with the find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not power door locks. Therefore,to unlock the fuel filler recommended in the previops texton fuel. Costly repairs door, youmay use the outside door keylock, the inside caused by use of improper fuel wouldn't be coveredby power door lock buttonor the Remote KeylessEntry your wairanty. key chain transmitter.To unlock thefuel door, dockall To' check on fuel availability, ask auto club,or doors. If the remote keyless entry transmitteris used, an the UNLOCK button must be pressed twice. contact a majoroil company that does businessin the country where you'll be driving. You can also write us at the following address for. advice. Just tell usWhere you're going and giveyour Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation North American Export Sales (NAES) 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7

6-4 Filling Your Tank A CAUTION: . Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasolineor refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from gasoline.

The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s sideof your vehicle.

6-5 While refueling, hang the capinside the he1 door. If you have the (L36)~3800 V6 engine, your fuel cap will be tethered and ywcannot hangit on the inside fuel door while refueling. To take off the cap,turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise),

6-6 When you put the cap backon, turn it to the right until you .hear at least three clicks. Make surefully you install the cap. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been, leftoff or improperly installed.This would If you get gasoline onyourself and then allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See something ignites it, you could be badly burned. “Malfmction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. Gasoline can spray outon you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spraycan happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in NOTICE: hot weather. Open the fuelfiller cap slowly and wait for any‘(hiss” noise to stop. Then un,screw If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right the capall the way. type. Your dealer canget one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitor have proper venting, and your’fuel tank andemissions system Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from might be damaged. painted surfaces as soon as possible. See“Cleaning the Outside of Your Pontiac” in the Index.

\ Fuel Door Manual Release (‘Option) Checking T,hingsUnder the Hood If your vehicle has fuela The following sectionstell you how to check fluids, door lock,the fuel door lubricants and important underhoodparts. can be opened manually in case of an electrical A CAUTION: power failure. i An electric fan underthe hood can start up and injure you even whenthe engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

L Y

Open thetrunk, the release mechanismis on the driver’s side of the vehicle, atthe top of the trunk compartment. CAUTION: Pull the tab rearwardto release the fuel door. A Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and NOTICE: start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and Prying on a locked fuel filler door can damageit. other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others Use the remote fuel door manual release located could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill in the trunk. things that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-8 Hood Release To open the hood, first pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle.It is next to the parking brake pedal near the floor.

b

Then go to thefront of the vehicle and push up the on secondary hood release. Lift the hood. Before closingthe hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly. Thenjust pull the hood down and close it firmly. 3800 Series I1 Engine (L36 - Code K) When you open the bod, you’ll see:

A. Engine Coolant RecoveryTank D. Engine Oil Dipstick G. Brake Master Cylinder B. Battery E. Engine Oil Fill Cap H. Air Cleaner C. Radiator Pressure Cap F. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

6-10 3800 Supercharged Engine (L67 - Code 1) (Option)

When you open the hood, ~011'11 see:

A. Engine Coolant RecoveryTank D. Engine Oil Dipstick G. Brake Master Cylinder B. Battery E. Engine Oil Fill Cap H. Air Cleaner C. Radiator PressureCap F. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

6-11 Supercharged Engine (Option) Engine Oil Your Bonneville may havea 3800 Supercharged engine. the CHECK The superchargeris a device which is designed If OIL to pump LEVEL light on the more into the engine than it would normally use. air instrument panel This air mixed with fuel, creates increased engine comes on, it means power. Since the superchargeris a pump is driven and CHECK OIL you need to check from an engine accessory drive belt, increased pressure your engine oil level is available at all driving conditions. LEVEL right away. The Powertrain Control Module(PCM), works with a vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure required during specific driving conditions. When this increased pressure or boostis not desired, suchas during idling and light throttle cruising, the excess air that the supercharger is pumpingis routed througha bypass. For more information, see “Check Oil LevelLight” in All of these controls, working together provide high the Index. You should check your engine oil level performance characterand fuel efficiency in the regularly; this isan added reminder. 38010 V6 Supercharged engine. It’s a good ideato check your engineoil every timeyou The-powersteering pump usesa remote reservoir get fuel.In order to getan accurate reading, theoil must mounted on the throttle and cruise control cable bracket.be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground. See “Maintenance Schedule”in the Indexfor when you should checkthe fluid. .. ,--. , I ’.:? .. .. . 1

6-12 The engine oil dipstick Checking Engine Oil is located immediately Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towelor behind the enginefans cloth, then pushit back in all theway. Remove it again, and in frontof the keeping the tip down, and check the level. engine oilfill cap. The top of the dipstick is a round, yellow loop.

Turn off the engine and give the oila few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

6-13 When to Add Oil What Kind of Oil to Use If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to Oils recommended for your vehiclecan be identified by add some oil. But you must use the right kind.This part looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, indicates that theoil has been certified by the American see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol. E I NOTICE: If you change your own oil, be sure you Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso use oil that has the much oil that the oil level gets above the Starburst symbol on, : cross-hatched area that shows the proper I the front,of the oil operating range, your engine could be damaged. container. If you have your oil changed for you, besure. the oil put The engine oilfill cap is behind the engine oil dipstick into your engine is and engine fans. American Petroleum I Just fill it enough to put the level somewherein the Institute certified for proper operating range.Push tKe dipstick all the way gasoline engines. back in when you’re through. You should also use the proper viscosityoil for your vehicle, as shown in thefollowing chart: As shown.inthe chart,SAE 1OW-30 is best for your I RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS 1 vehicle. However,you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going

FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST to be colder than60 OF (16 O C) before your next oil I SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THEEXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. change. When it’s very cold, you should SAEuse 5W-30. These numbers onan oil container show its WOK viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils, HOT FOR THIS such as SAE 20W-50. WEATHER SYMBOL 4 / NOTICE:

Use only engineoil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damagenot covered by your warranty.

SAE 10W-30 PREFEMEO GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for abow (PF (-18°C) SAE 5W-30 your vehicle.

\ Engine Oil Additives COLD Don’t add anything to your oil.Your Pontiac dealeris I WEATHER ready to advise if youthink something should be added. DO NOT USE SAE MW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

6-15 What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engineoil contains certain elements that may be -for your and could a Most trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). unhealthy skin This is particularly importantwhen outside even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stayon your skin temperatures are below freezing. for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw a Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent away clothing or rags containing usedengine oil. (See driving in stop-and-go traffic). the manufacturer’s warnings .about the anduse disposal a Most trips are through dusty areas. of oil products.) a You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of Used oil can be a real threat to the environment.If you your vehicle. change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil a The vehicleis used for delivery service, police, taxi by putting it in the trash,pouring it on the ground, into or other commercial application. sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead, Driving under these conditions causes engine to oil recycle itby taking it toa place that collects usedoil. If break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your you have a problem properly disposingof you used oil, vehicle, thenyou need to changeyour oil and filter ask your dealer,a service station or a local recycling every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or ,3 months -- whichever center for help. occurs first. I If none of them is true, changethe oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever occurs fiist. Driving a vehicle witha fully warmeld engine under highway conditions causes engineoil to break down slower.

6-16 Air Cleaner Before servicing the air cleaner, remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) coverby removing the two wing nuts. The PCMis located on the driver’s side front edge of the engine compartment.

2. Remove the air intake hose that snaps over the throttle body by pulling the hose upwardand away from the throttle body. After detaching the hose from the throttlebody, pull back the entire rear portion of the air cleanerby pulling upward and rearward.

1. Remove the two screwson the air cleaner housing cover.

6-17 I Operating theengine with the aircleaner off can cause you or others tobe burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful workingon the engine with the air cleaner off. 3. Replace the air filter. 4. Re-install the rear sectionof the air cleaner. 5. Reattach the air intake hose. NOTICE: Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to replace the filter. air If the air cleaner isoff, a backfire cancause a See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index. damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner inplace when you’re driving.

,...... Supercharger Oil How to Check and Add Oil Check oil only when the engine is cold.Allow the Unless you are engine to cool two to three hours after technically qualified running. and have the proper tools, you should let your dealeror a qualified service center perform this If you remove the supercharger oilfill plug while maintenance. the engineis hot, pressure maycause hot oil to blow outof the oil fill hole.You may be burned. Do not remove the plug until the engine cools.

1. Remove the wiring harness shield. When to Check 2. Clean the area around theoil fill plug before removing it. Check oil level every30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every 36 months, whichever occurs,first. 3. Remove the oil fill plug using a Torx@ drive. 4. The oil level is correct whenit just reaches the What Kind of Oil to Use bottom of the threads of the inspection hole. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index use only the recommended oil. 5. Replace the oil plug with the O-ring in place. Torque and to 88 lb-in (10 N-m). 6. Replace wiring harness shield. Automatic Transaxle Fluid NOTICE: When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid Too much or too little fluid can damage your level is when the engine oilis changed. transaxle. Too much can mean that someof the

~ fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts Change both the fluidand filter every50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicleis mainly driven under oneor or exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Be sure to more of these conditions: get an' accurate readingif you check your transaxle fluid. In .heavy eity.traffic where the 'outside temperature regularly reaches90 OF(32 O C)or higher. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking.& .@an: Je 0 In hilly or mountainous terrain. fluid levelif you have beendriving: 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. 0 When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C). 0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. 0 At high speed for quitea while. If you do not use your vehicle underany of these In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. conditions, the fluidand filter do not require changing. While pulling a trailer. See "Scheduled Maintenance Services"in the Index. .. To get the right reading,the fluid should be at normal I .(.. :.-'Bowto Check operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F Because &is operation can be a little dBicult, you may (82°C to 93°C). choose to havethis done at your P'ontiac dealership Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 15 miles Service Department. (24 km) when outside temperatures are above50°F If you do it yourself, be' sure to follow all the instructions (10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you may here, or you could geta false reading on the dipstick. have to drive longer. Checking the Fluid Level 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pullit back out again. Park your vehicle ona level place. Keep the engine running.

0 With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). 0 With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three secondsin each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). Let the engine run at idlefor three to five minutes. Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:

I. The transhission 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower oil dipstick top is a level. The fluid level mustbe in the cross-hatched area. round, red loop' and is next to the brake 4. If the fluid level isin the acceptable range, pushthe master cylinder dipstick back in all the way. behind the engine i block.Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean ragor paper towel.

6-21 How to Add Fluid Engine Coolant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what The cooling system in your vehicleis filled with new bind of tmhsaxle fluid to use.See 6‘Recomended DEX-COOL(orange-colored, silicate-free) engine Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. coolant. This coolant is designed to remainin your If the fluid levelis low, add only enough of the proper vehicle for5 years or 100,000 miles (166 000 km), fluid to bringthe level into the cross-hatched areaon whichever occurs first. the dipstick. The following explainsyour cooling system and how to Pull out the dipstick. add coolant whenit is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in Using a long-neck funnel, add enoughMd at the the Index. dipstick holeto bring itto the proper level. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a pint (0.5 L). A 50/50 mixture of water &d the proper coolantfor Don’t overfiI2. We recommend you useonly fluid your Pontiac will: labeled DEXRON*-III,, because fluid with that label e Give freezing protection down -34°F to (-37°C). is made especially foryo& automatic transax18e. e Give boiling protection upto 265 OF(1 29 O C). Damage causedby fluid otherthan DEXRON’@-III is not coveredby your new vehiclewarranty. 0 Protect againstrust and corrosion. After adding fluid, recheckthe fluid levelas 0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. described under“How to Check.” 0 Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick backin all the way. GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer)(GM Part NOTICE: No. 3634621) with any complete coolant change.If you use this mixture, you don’t need toadd anything else. When adding coolant it is important thatyou use

DEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free) coolant meeting GM Specification 6277M. If silicated coolant is added to thesystem, premature engine, heater core or radiator Adding only plain water to yourcooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other corrosion may result. In addition, the engine ’ ‘ . -coolantwill require changesooner -- at liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper 308,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months coolant mix will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning whichever occurs first. system is set for theproper coolant mix. With plain wateror the wrongmix, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat What toUse warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably others could be burned. Use a 5060 mix of clean distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL (orange-colored, water andDEX-COOL TM (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze that meetsGM Specification silicate-free) antifreeze.

6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. Use L Checking Coolant NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mix can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE: When your engineis cold, the coolant level should be If YOU use the propercoolant, you don’t have to at FULL COLD or a little higher. Whenyour engine is add extra inhibitors oradditives which claim to warm, the level shouldbe up toFULL HOT or a improve .the system. These can be harmful. little higher. If this light comes on, it means you'relow on CALJTION: engine coolant. A LOW lhrning the radiator pressure capwhen the engine and radiator are hotcan allow steam and COOLANT scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at theradiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap-- even a little -- when the engine and radiator arehot. Adding Coolant If you need more coolant,add the proper mix at the Add. coolant mix at the recovery tank, butbe careful not coolant recovery tank. to spill it.

r I You can be burned if you spill coolant,on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol, and it will burn if'the engineparts arehot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.

6-25 Radiator Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid

NOTICE:

Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type capand must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

1I --$,..: :; ' -%.Thermostat. Engine coolant temperatureis controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolaxit system. The thermostatstops the flow of coolant throughthe radiator untilthe coolant When to Check Power Steering Fluid reaches a preset temperature. It is not necessaryto regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect thereis a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

6-26 How To Check Power Steering Fluid Adding Washer Fluid When the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replacecap the and completely tightenit. Then removethe cap again and look at the fluid levelon the dipstick. The level should be at theFULL COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluidto bring the level up to the mark. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Always usethe proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can causeleaks and dam’age hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid Open the cap labeled WASHERFLUID ONLY Add washer fluid until the tankis full. What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.If you will be operating your vehiclein an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

6-27 Brakes NOTICE: Brake Fluid When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. 0 Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause thesolution to freeze and damage yoqr washerfluid tank and other partsof the washersystem. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. 0 Fill your washer fluidtank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion, which could damage thetank if it is completely full. 0 Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. Your brake master cylinder reservoiris here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. There me only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system.If it is, you should have 6-28 your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner What to Add or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work When you do need brakefluid, use only DOT-3 brake at all. fluid -- such as Delco Supreme11 @ (GM Part So, it isn’t a good idea to“top off’ your brake fluid. No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed Adding brake fluid won’t gorrect a leak.If you add fluid container only, and always clean the brakefluid. when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much reservoir cap before removingit. fluid when you get new brake linings.You should add - (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system. XLUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakesmay not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on. thebrake hydraulic system.

When your brake fluidfalls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on.A chime will sound if you try to drive with this warning light on. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. Brake Wear NOTICE: Your Pontiac hasfront disc brakesand rear drum brakes. Using the wrong fluid can badly damage Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a brake system parts. Forexample, just a few high-pitched warning sound when the brakepads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come go or drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine and be heard all the timeyou vehicle is moving (except when oi1,’in your brake system can damagebrake you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). system parts so badly that they’ll have to be rep,laced. Don’t letsomeone put in the wrong kind of fluid. I A CAUTION: If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be The brake wear warning sound means that damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid sooner or later your brakeswon’t work well. on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off That could lead to accident. When you hear immediately. See“Appearance Care” in an the brake wear warningsound, have your the Index. vehicle serviced.

I NOTICE: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result incostly brake repair.

6-30 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake Replacing Brake System Parts squeal when the brakes arefirst applied or lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with The braking system on a modernvehicle is complex. Its your brakes. many parts have tobe of top quality and work well together if the vehicle isto have really good braking. Free movement of brake calipers and properly torqued Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake parts in them, as your Pontiac does whenit is.new. pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake calipers When you replace partsof your braking system-- for for movement, brake padsfor wear, and evenly torque example, when your brake linings wear down and you wheel nuts in the proper sequence GMto specifications. have to have new ones putin -- be sure you get new genuine GM replacement parts.If you don’t, your Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, butif brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if you ever heara rear brake, rubbing noise, have the rear someone putsin brake linings that are wrongfor your brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes should be removed and inspected each time the tiresare can change-- for the worse. The braking performance removed for rotation or changing.When you have the you’ve come to expect can changein many other ways if front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected,too. someone putsin the wrong replacement brake parts. Brake linings should always be replacedas complete axle sets. Battery Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom@ battery.You Brake Pedal Travel never have to add water oneto of these. When it’s time See your dealerif the brake pedal does not return to for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom normal height,or if there is a rapid increase in pedal battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown travel. This could be asign of brake trouble. on theoriginal battery’s label. : 1 ..I Vehicle Storage ... Brake Adjustment If you’re not goingto drive your vehicle for 25 days Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the or more, takeoff the black,negative (-) cable from vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. 6-31 the battery.This will help keepyour battery from running down. A CAUTION: - A CAUTION: I Batteries have acidthat can burnyou and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and aren’t careful.See “Jump Starting” in the’hclex can burst if you drop or scratch thebulb. You or for tipson working around a battery without others could be injured. Be sure to read and getting brt. follow the instructionson the bulbpackage.

:ontact your deder to learn how to prepare your vehicle If you go through a high pressure car wash, or itis very for longerstorage periods. humid, your headlamps may “fog up.”This is normal. The lenses should clear by themselves in time. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in the Index. r. Headlamps .. or bulb type, s,ee “Replacement Bulbs” in the Idex.

I- Driver's Side Replacement Passenger's Side Replacement

1. Reach behind the headlamp assembly andturn the 1. Remove the two bolts with a 10 mm socket. bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove the bulb assembly.

2. Remove the bulb from the assembly. -c 3. Replace the bulb and reverse the steps to install the new bulb assembly.

6-33 2. Slide the headlamp assembly outward(to the left) 3. Tip the assembly and turn the bulb assembly and lift it out. counterclockwise to remove it.

6-34 Sidemarker Lamps 1. Remove headlamp assembly on both sides of the vehicle, using the passenger’s side headlamp removal procedure as described previouslyin this section. 2. Turn the sidemarker lamp bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove. 3. ‘Replace the bulbby turning clockwise. 4. Install the headlamp assemblies using the procedure for the-passenger’sside headlamp installationas described previouslyin this section. Fog Lamps 4. Replace the bulb and reverse the steps to installthe 1. Reach up under thefront of the car to the fog new bulb assembly. lamp connector. !. Unplug the connector and twist thebulb counterclockwise to remove. Notice: There are adjustment screws near the fog lamp assembly. Takecare not to touch these screws. 3. Twist the replacement bulb clockwise to install. 4. Plug in the connector. Rear Quarter Tail/Stop/Turn SignaUSidemarker Lamps For bulb type, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.

3. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it.

1. Remove the plastic nut holding the cqhgin place. 2. Pull the carpetingaway from the rear cornerof the trunk.

6-36 Runk Mounted Taillamps and Back-up Lamps For bulb type, see “Replacement Bulbs”in the Index.

4. Replace the bulb and reverse the stepsinsta to .ll the new bulb assembly.

1. Push in on the centerof the plastic push pin with a pen. The push pin should eject.

6-37 2. Pull the pin with your fingersto remove it. (There 3. Remove thefive nuts that hold the assembly in place are four pins altogether -- two on the driver’s side with a 10 mm socket. Pull carpet up and out of the and twoon the passenger’s side.) way to remove center nut. (There are two nuts on the driver’s side, two on the passenger’s side andone in the middle.) 4. Lift up on both plastic side flaps at the same time 6. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove it. (driver’s side shown) and lift the assembly out. 5. Carefully let go of the decklid and letit raise completely. The assembly will still be connected to the wiring harness, but now youwill have access to the bulbs. 7. Pull out the taillamp bulb to removeit. 8. If you are replacing the back-up bulb, it must be turned and pulledbut to be removed. 9. Reverse the steps to install the new bulb assembly.

6-40 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires We don’t make tires.Your new Pontiaccomes with high-quality tires made by a leadingtire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, seeyour Pontiac Warranty booklet for details.

1 A CAUTION: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a resultof too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious Replacement blades comein different typesand are accident. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove the the Index. type with a release clip: CAUTION: (Continued) 1. Pull the windshield wiperarm away fiom the windshield. 2. Push down on the releaseclip with a screwdriver and pull the blade assemblyoff the wiperarm.

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm. ’ For the correct windshield wiper blade replacement length and type, see “Capacitiesand Specifications’’in the Index. 6-41 NOTICE: Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras Don’t let anyonetell you that underinflationor overloaded tires. The resulting accident overinflation is all right.It’s not. If your tires could cause serious injury.Check all tires don’t have enough air (underinflation),you can frequently to maintain therecommended get the following: pressure. Tire pressure shouldbe ch’ecked when your tires are cold. Too much flexing Overinflated tires are more likely to be 0 Too much heat cut, punctured or brokenby a sudden 0 Tire overloading impact -- such as when you hit a pothole. @ Badwear Keep tires at therecommended pressure. 0 Bad handling Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your 0 Bad fuel economy. tread is badly worn, or if your tires have If your tires have too much air (overinflation), been damaged, replace them. you can get the following: Unusual wear 0 Bad handling Inflation - Tire Pressure Rough ride The Tire-Loading Informkion label which is on the rear 0 Needless damage from road hazards. edge of the driver’s doorshows the correct inflation pressur,es for yow tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehiclehas been sitting forat least three hours or driven no more than a mile. When to Check Check your tires once a month or more. Don’t forget your compact spare tire.It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tellif your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look~ properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. The purposeof regular rotationis to achieve more They help preventl&s by keeping outdirt and moisture. uniform wearfor all tireson the vehicle. The first rotation is the mostimportant. See “Scheduled Tire Inspection and Rotation Maintenance Services”in the Index for scheduled Tires shouldbe inspected every 6,000 to 8,000 miles rotation intervals. (10 000 to 13 000 km) for any signs of unusual wear. When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation If unusual -wearis present, rotate your tires as soon as pattern shown here. possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for Ne,wDon’t include the compact spare tirein your tire rotation. Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later this in section for more information.

,. . After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and When It’s Time for New Tires rear inflation pressures as shownon the Tire-Loading Infannation label. Make certain that all wheel nuts One way to tell when it’s are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”in time for new tiresis to the Index. check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 rnm) or less of tread remaining. I --I Rust or dirton a wheel, or on thepads to which it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can YOUneed a new tire if any of the following statements use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be are true: sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you 0 YOU can see the indicators at threeor more places need to, to get all therust or dirt off. (See around the tire. “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.) 0 you can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire hasa bump, bulge OT split.

6-44 The tire has a puncture,cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well becauseof the size or location CAUTION: of the damage. A Buying New Tires Mixing tires could causeyou to lose control while To find out what kind and sizeof tires you need, look at driving. If you mix tiresof different sizes or types the Tire-Loading Information label. (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. The tires installed on your vehicle whenit was new had Using tires of different sizes may also cause a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number oneach tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way size and type tires onall four wheels. your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed It’s all rightto drive with your compact spare, to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, though. It was developedfor use on your vehicle. traction, ride and other things during normal serviceon your vehicle.If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number willbe followed by an“MS” Uniform Tire Quality Grading (for mud and snow). The following information relates to the system developed If you ever replace your tires with those not having a by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety TPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, and temperature performance.(Th.zs applies only to bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saveror temporary use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

I 6-45 While the tires availableon General Motors passenger . Warning: The traction grade assigned to this istire based cars and light 'trucksmay vary with respect to these on braking (straightahead) traction testsand does not grades, they must also conform to Federal safety include cornering (turning) traction. requirements and additional General Motors Tire Perforrnance Criteria (TPC) standards. Temperature - A, B, C The temperature grades areA (the highest),B, and C, Treadwear representing the tire's resistance to ,the generationof I The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory conditions ona specified government test course. -For test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the example, a tire graded150 would wear one and a half material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, (1 1/2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire andaxcessive temperature can lead to sudden tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and performance which all passenger car tires must meet may depart significantly from the norm dueto variations under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard in driving habits, service practices and differencesin No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof road characteristics and climate. performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law. Traction - A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B, established €or a tire that is properly inflatedand not and C, and they represent thetire's ability to stop on wet overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or . ' pavement as measured under controlid conditions on excessive loading, either separately in or combination, ..? specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure. .~. .-I - - A tire'marked C may have poor traction performance. . I .,. . I. ..- ,. ..-. . . .. , 1. . , ;::-;.,;:,> ::; ,? ..';;Y, i ... .. ~ ~.:.:..-*,,~'.v;,, - .%$ .-. *. :-,- =.: ;., -,r- '.: '. . , -.; =,,,-,

Y1.Y. .r. 6-46 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced same way as the one it replaces. carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. If you need to replace anyof your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace themonly with newGM origipal In most cases, you will not needto have your wheels equipment parts.This way, you will be sure to have aligned again. However,if you notice unusual tire wear the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel 'nuts for your or your vehicle pulling one way or tlie other, the Pontiac model. ahgnment may need to be reset. If you noticeyour' vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your I wheels may need' to be rebalanced. , , 1' . . , .- . .. ; 12CAUTION: Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that.is bent, cracked,or badly rusted Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the It could affect the braking and handling of your wheel leaks air, replaceit (except somealumhum vehicle, make your tireslose air and makeyou wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). Seeyour lose control.You could havea collision in which Pontiac dealer if anyof these conditionsexist. you or others could be injured. Always use Your dealer will know thekind of wheel you need. the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

6-47 Tire Chains NOTICE:

The wrong wheelcan also cause problems with NOTICE: bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle Use tire chainsonly where legal and only when ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to you must. Use only SAE Class 44S”type chains the body and chassis. that arethe proper size for your tires. Install them on thefront tires and tighten them as .. -* tightly as possible with the endssecurely ‘ ..’ see “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Indexfor fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain ‘more information. manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hearthe chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten -. ., .. them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels I with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

...I . .‘I, . .‘. --. 8; . Putting a used wheel onyour vehicle is ;... . dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or * “

. -1 . ,.; .. how many miles it’s been driven. It could fail I I., -.~.<. -. :% suddenly and cause an accident. If have to .. ?1 you - .,\ 3 :: :. <.. .:>. replace a wheel, use a new GM original I ...) . .I , . ,,.. ‘,,‘t, ., , equipment wheel. -.. .?. I Appearance Care anyDon'tuse of theseunlessthis manualcan. yousays In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Remember, cleaning productscan be hazardous. Some aretoxic. Others can burstinto flame if youstrike a Alcohol match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are 0 Laundry Soap dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. Bleach When you use anything from a containerto clean your Pontiac,be sure to follow the manufacturer's warnings ReducingAgents and instructions. And always open your doors or windowswhen you'recleaning the inside. ~:y -.% :'; - : Cleaning the Inside of Your Pontiac . ~..1.. . >, .. ..&.- . .:.. .'#'.-: Use a vacuum cleaner oftento get ridof dust andloose Never use these to clean your vehicle: .f,r :'.;.,.,- \..:,.. i$,;--;;l.*. dirt. Wipe vinylor leather with a clean, dampcloth .I .. .., , ..; .. Gasoline .. Your Pontiac dealer has twoGM cleaners, a Benzene solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered Naphtha cleaner. Theywill clean normal spotsand stains very well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather. CarbonTetrachloride Here are some cleaning tips: Acetone Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. PaintThinner ' Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. 0 Turpentine 0 Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change toa clean area LacquerThinner often.. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. Nail Polish Remover Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them,don't saturate thestained ma. They can all be hazardousT- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. 0 If a ring forms after spbt cleaning, clean the entire Using Foam-Type Cleaneron Fabric If you needto use a solvent: Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loosedirt. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife or scrapex Use very little cleaner, light Always cleana whole trim phel or section. Mask pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. Cleaning should start at the outside of ‘thestain, Mix’Multi-PurposePowdered Cleaner following the “feathering” toward the center. Keep changingto directions on the container label. a clean section of the cloth. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. 0 When you cleana stain from fabric, immediatelydry the area with a blow dryer to help ‘preventa cleaning ring. Don’t saturate the material. Don’t rub it roughly. Special Cleaning Problems As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, usea sponge Greasy or Oily - Stains to remove thesuds. Stains causedby grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe Rinse the section witha clean, wet sponge. polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic Wipe off what’s left with .a slightly damp paper towelcreams, vegetable oils,wax ,crayon, tar and asphalt can or cloth. be removed as follows: Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer. 0 Carefully scrape off excess stain. Wipe with a clean cloth. Follow the solvent-type instructions descriw earlier. I ShOe.-pohh,wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if Using ,Solvent-TypeCleaner on Fabric left on a-vehicle’s seat fabric.They should be removed First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleanerat all, as soon as possible. Be carefbl, becausethe cleaner Some spots and stains will clean off better withjust will dissolve them andmay cause them to spread. water and mild soap. Non-Greasy Stains Cleaning Vinyl Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit Use warm water and a clean cloth. juice, milk, softdrinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can be removed asfollows: 0 Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.You may have to do it more than once. 0 Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. 0 Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polishwill stain if you don't get themoff quickly. Usea clean cloth and 0 If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions a GM Vinylbeather Cleaner or equivalent product. described earlier. Cleaning Leather If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat thearea with a waterbaking soda solution: Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water anda mild soap or 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) saddle soap. of lukewarm water. For stubborn stains, usea GM VinylLeather Cleaner If needed, deanlightly with solvent-type cleaner. or equivalent product. Combination Stains 0 Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-basedor abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. Stains causedby candy, ice cream, mayonnaise,chili sauce and unknowri stains can be removed as follows: Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately.If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm Carefully scrape off excess st&, then clean with the leather. cool 'water and allowto dry.

0 If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner.

6-51 Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel Don't use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decalson the insiderear Use only mild soap and waterto clean the top surfaces window, since they may haveto be scrapedoff later. Ilf of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or abrasive cleaners are usedon the insideof the rear waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. and even make it difficult to see through the windshield Any temporary license should not be attached acrossthe under certain conditions. defogger grid. Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of the Keep belts cleanand dry. Windshield'and Wiper Blades --- Lf the windshieldis not clearafter using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when Npning, wax I A CAUF 'N:- or other material m'ay be onthe blade or windshield. Clean the outsideof the wirmdshield with GM Windshield Do not bleach or dye safetybelts. If you do, it Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part No. lQS0011). may severely weaken them.In a crash they might The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you not be ableto provide adequate protection. rinse it with water. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously witha cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then r rinse theblade with water. Glass Wiper blades should be checkedon a regular basisand Glass shouldbe cleaned often.GM Glass Cleaner(GM replaced whenworn. Part No. 1050427) or a liquid householdglass cleaner will remove norha1 tobacco smoke and dust films.

. 6-52 Weatherstrips Finish Care Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last Occasional waxing or mild polishingof your Pontiac by longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent from your dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials” application may be required. (See “Recommended in the Index.) Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.) Your Pontiac has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paintf~sh: The Cleaning the Outsideof Your Pontiac clearcoat gives more depthd gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. of color, gloss retention and durability. Washing Your Vehicle NOTICE: The best way to preserveyour vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on Don’t wash your vehiclein the direct raysof the sun. a basecoatklearcoat paint finish maydull the Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents.Use finish or leave swirl marks. liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other should be flushed promptly and not allowed to ondry salts; ice melting agents, roadoil and tar, tree sap, bird the surface, or they could stain.Dry the finish witha droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc. can soft, clean chamois or 100%a cotton towel to avoid damage your vehicle’s finishif they remain on painted suyface scratches and water spotting. surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible,If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked High pressure car washesmay cause water to enter your safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. vehicle. 6-53 Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their tolla pkriod over of years. NOTICE: You canhelp to keep the paint finish looking newkeeping by your Pontiac garaged or covered whenever possible. When applying a tire dressing always take care to Aluminum or Chrome Wheels wipe off any oversprayor splash fromall painted (If So Equipped) surfaces on the body or wheelsof the vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the .l Keep your wheels clean usinga &oftclean cloth with paint finish. mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly,dry with a soft clean towel'.A wax may then beapplied. Sheet Metal Damage The surfaceof'these wheels is similar to the painted If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal surface of your vehicle.Don't use strong soaps, repa3 or replacement, make sure the body repair shop chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or applies anti-corrosion materialto the parts repaired or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because you could replaced to'restore corrosion protection. damage the surface. You may use chrome polishon chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surfaceof the Finish Damage wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Any stone chips, fracturesor deep scratchesin the finish Don't take your vehicle throughan automatic car wash should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These quickly and may develop intoa major repair expense. brushes canalso damage the surfaceof these wheels. Minor chips and scratches canbe repaired with touch-up materials available fromyour dealer or other service Tires outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected To clean your tires, usea stiff brush witha tire cleaner. in your dealer'sbody and paint shop.

*.,,,: ; ,?'... '. - ' ,ti ...... Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Chemicals usedfor ice and snow removal and dust Some weather and atmospheric conditions can createa control can collect on the underbody.If these are not chemical fallout. Airbornepollutants can fall uponand removed, accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can . the underbody parts such asfuel lines, frame,floor take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and pan, and exhaust system even though they have small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. corrosion protection. Although no defect in the paintjob causes this, Pontiac At least every spring,flush these materialsfrom the will repair, atno charge to the owner, the surfacesof underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudnew vehicles damaged bythis fallout condition within and other debris can collect.Dirt packed in closed areas 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. whichever occursfirst. Your dealer oran underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you. Appearance Care Materials Chart

12345725 I 12 oz. (0.354 L) I Silicone Tire Shine I Shines tires

I See your GeneralMators Parts Department for theseproducts. * Notrecornmended for pigskin suedeleather. See “Fluids andLubric’ants” in theIndex. **Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.

6-56 . , . ,-; Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover.very It’s helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label is: 1l111111111l1 11111111111111 11111111111111111111111111111111 I III 11111.11 1.11 111 111111 II. lll~~lII1111111~1111111..1111II~ 0 0 your VIN, bl SAMPLE4UXTM072675 fi0 the model designation, ENGINEA967 \ ASSEMBLY paint information,and C ODE MODELCODE YEAR PLANT e a list of all production options and special equipment. This is the legal identifier for your Pontiac. It appears on a platein the front cornerof the instrument panel, on the Be sure that this labelis not removed fromthe vehicle. driver’s side.You can see it if you look through Ithe windshield from outsideyour vehicle. TheVIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificatesof title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth characterin your VIN is the engine code. 1. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications, and replacement parts.

6-57 Electrical System Windshield Wipers Add-on Electrical Equipment The windshield wiper motor is protectedby an internal circuit breakerand a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow, etc., the wiperwill stop until the motor NOTICE: cools. If tbe overload is .caused bysome electrical problem, besure to have it fixed. Don’t add anything electricalto your Pontiac Power Windows and Other Power Options . % .- ...a . unless you check with your dealer first. Some s; i; Circuit breakersin the fuse panel protectthe power electrical equipment can damage your vehicle ..b.., r -‘ ‘i’-’t windows other power accessories. Whenthe current . +, and the damage wouldn’t be coveredby your load is too’heavy, the circ,uit breaker opensand closes, warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or can keep other components fromworking as goes away. they should. MaxifusedRelay Center Youfvehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto To check the fuses in this underhoodfuse center, turn add anything electricalto your Pontiac, see “Servicing the two knobs one-quarter turn counterclockwise and Ysur Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac”in the Index. loosen the metal wing nut on the passenger sideof the cover. Then remov’e the cover.The inside of the cover Headlamp Wiring has a chart thatexplahs the featuresand controls governed by each fuse and relay. The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit

I -.: ~ _I = breaker. electrical overloadwill cause the lamps to go L An -. . :. i , . , on .andoff, or in mrne cases to re& off. .Ifthis happens, have your headlamp system checked right away.

6-58 Fuses and Circuit Breakers Driver’s Side Fuse Block The wiring circuitsin your vehicle are protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new ofone the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some featureof your vehicle that you can get along without-- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the eomect amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can. The driver’s side fuse blockis to the leftof the steering There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the driver’s wheel, under the instrument panel. side and passenger’s side fuse blocks. Snap off the cover to reveal the fuses. You’ll find a fuse puller clipped to the insideof the cover. Place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plasticend of the fuse. Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pullit out. Spare fuses are located in the slots labeled “Spare”on the following chart. When finished, replace the cover by snappingit back up into place. Fuse Usage 1 Circuit Breaker-Power Sunroof 2 Not Used 3 Power Seats 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 345 6 1A PASS-Key 2A Spare 3A Not Used t 4A Not Used 5A Ignition (Run), Automatic AJC Control, Base Cluster, Cruise Control 6A Courtesy Lamps, Power Mirrors 7A Not Used 8A Not Used 9A Cigarette Lighter 1B Turn Signal, Back-up Lamps, Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock 2B Spare 3B Not Used 4B Not Used

6-60 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage 5B Anti-Lock Brake System, 5D Base A/C Computer Command Ride, 6D Fog Lamps Electronic Level Control 7D Not Used 6B Brake and Hazard Lamps 8D Radio 7B Not Used 9D Not Used 8B InteriorI Lighting 1E Not Used 9B Electronic Level Control 2E Air Bag System, PASS-Key 1c Air Bag System 3E Not Used 2c Spare 4E Not Used 3c Not Used 5E Rear Defog 4,c Not Used 6E Not Used 5c Cooling Fans, Trmsmle 7E Not Used 6C Parking Lamps 8E Wipers, Washer 7c Not Used N ot Used9E Not I 8C Not Used 9c (Battery), Radio, Cluster Passenger%Side Fuse Block 1D Ignition (Run/Crank), Additional fuses are locatedin the relay center, onthe Chime, Cluster passenger's side, below the instrument panel.You must : i', 2D Spare .. .- . '! i . -." remove the sound insulator on the right side of the 3D Not Used >. passengerfoot well to replace these fbses. 4D Not Used Since replacing these fusesis difficult. We recommend that you see your dealerif you needme replaced. Fuse Usage 1 Door Locks 2 Trunk Release, RAC 3 Horns 4 Not Used 5 Miscellaneous Engines Controls 6 Fuel Pump 7 Injectors 8 Powertrain Control Module 9 Not Used

10 ' Not Used 11 AJC Programmer 12 Not Used

4 Replacement Bulbs Outside Lamps Bulb Lamp Monitor Message

' Front . Parking/Tum Lamps ...... 3157NA PARK LAMP/TURN SIGNAL Halogen Headlamps Low-Beam ...... 9006 .. HEADLAMP High-Beam ...... 9005 HIGH-BEAM LAMP SidemarkerLamps ...... 194 PARKLAMP FogLamps ...... 880 Rear Taillamps ...... 194 TAILLAMP Back-up Lamps ...... 1156 BACK-UP LAMP License Plate Lamp ...... 194 TAILLAMP Center High-MountedS toplamp ...... 1156 BRAKELAMP Sidemarker ...... 194 TAILLAMP Stoplamps ...... 2057 BRAKELA" T~rn...... 1156 TURN SIGNAL LAMP Trunk Lamp ...... 21 1-2 Redacement Bulbs 1 Inside Lamps Bulb Front Visor Vanity Mirror Laps ...... 564 Rear Visor Vanity Mirror Lamps ...... 12 V 8W Festoon (A3 1733) DoorLamps ...... 74 -Front Courtesy/Reading Lamps ...... Rear Courtesy/JXeading Lamps ...... 12 V 8W Festoon (A3173B)563 Instrument Panel Sound InsulatorIP Sound 168Panel Lighting) (Lower Floor ...... GloveCompartmentLamp ...... 194 Ashtray Lamp ...... 161

6-64 I Capacities and Specifications Automatic TransaxleAT (Overdrive) Pan Removal and Replacement.... '...... 6.5 quarts (6.1 L) After Complete Overhaul...... 11 quarts (10.4 L) When draining or replacing torque converter, more fluid may be needed. CoolingSystem ...... 13 quarts (12.3 L) Enginecrankcase ...... 4.5 quarts (4.3 L) Oil change with filter change FuelTank ...... 18 gallons (68 L) Windshield Wiper Blades Type ...... Pin Length ...... 22 inches (565 mm) Tire Pressures See Tire-Loading Information label on driver's door WheelNutTorque ...... ;...... lOOlb-ft(140N~m) Refrigerant (R=l34a),Air Conditioning ...... See refrigerant charge label under the hood. ~ AirConditioning Refrigerants' Normal Maintenance

I, 1 .c, ;Not all air conditioning refrigerants are same. the Replacement Parts' If the air conditioning systemin your vehicle needs Air Cleaner Filter ...... AC Type A- 1096C refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. Engine Oil Filter ...... AC Type PF-47 If you're not sure,ask your Pontiac dealer. Transaxle Filter ...... GM Part No. 8651909 Sparkplugs ...... ; ...... AC Type 41-921 Engine Specifications Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52mm) 3800 Series 11 Engine (L36) VIN Engine Code ...... K Vehicle Dimensions Qpe ...... V6 Displacement ...... 3.8 Liters Wheelbase ...... 110.8 inches (2 814.3 mm) Horsepower ...... ,205-hp Tread Width Front ...... 60.4 inches (1 534.2 mm) Firing Order ...... I ...... 1-6-5-4-3-2 Thermostat Temperature ...... 195°F (91°C) Rear ...... i ...... 60.3 inches (1 531.6 mm) Length 201.9 inches (5 124.0 mm) 3800 Supercharged Engine (L67) ...... Width ...... 74.6 inches (1 893.2 mm) VIN Engine Code ...... '...... 1 Height ...... 55.7 inches (1 414.8mm) Type ...... V6 Displacement ...... 3.8 Liters Horsepower ...... 240-hp Firing Order ...... 1-6-5-4-3-2 Thermostat Temperature .... ; ...... 195°F (91°C) L36 Engine Accessory Belt The L36 engine uses an engine accessory belt.This diagram showsthe features connected and the routing. See “Maintenance Schedule”in the Indexfor when to check the belt. A. Power Steering B. Alternator C. Air Conditioning D. Idle E. Crank C E Coolant Pump

6-67 L67 Engine Accessory Belt steering pump, coolant pump and air conditioning. The outer belt drives the supercharger, Each belt hasown its tensioner and idler pulley. See “Maintenance Schedule” in the Index for when to check the accessory drive belts and the superchargeroil level. Have yourdealer check the oil level in the supercharger. 1. Front Belt 2. Back Belt A. Alternator B. Power Steering Pump C. Crank D. Supercharger E. Coolant Pump The Supercharged3800 (L67) engine uses two accessory E Air Conditioning drive belts. The inner belt drives the alternator, power NOTES NOTES

.

6-70 7 Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule

Introduction IMPORTANT. KEEP ENGINE OIL Your Vehicle and the Enviro,nment AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your RECOMMENDED vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures I are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even This section covers the maintenance required for your affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improperfluid Pontiac. Your vehicle needs these servicesto retain its levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level safety, dependability and emission control performance. of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehiclein good Protection condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your P Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your Pontiac dealer for details. How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what I should be checked whenever youstop for fuel. It also The remainder of this sectionis divided into fiveparts: explains what youcan easily do to helpkeep your “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows vehicle in good condition. what to have done and howoften. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains services can be complex,so unless you are technically important inspections that your Pontiac dealer’s service qualified and have the necessary equipment,you should department or another qualified servicecenter should let your dealer’s service departmentor another qualified perform. service center do these jobs. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some productsGM recommends to help keepyour CAUTION: I vehicle properly maintained. These products,or their /11 equivalents, shouldbe used whetheryou do the work yourself or have it done. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. Intrying to dosome jobs, you can “Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance you to record the maintenance performedon your vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be work only if you have the required know-how sure to write it down in this part. This will help you and the proper tools and equipment for the job. determine when your next maintenance shouldbe done. If you have any doubt, have a qualified In addition, it is agood idea to keepyour maintenance technician do thework. receipts. Theymay be neededto qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs, If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. t- \ I 7-2 ~ Part A: Scheduled Maintenance The proper fluids and lubricants to useare listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses Services these. All parts should be replaced alland necessary Using Your Maintenance Schedule repairs done beforeyou or anyone else drives the vehicle. We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly These schedulesare for vehicles that: how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances carry passengers and cargo within recommended only a few times a week. Or you may drive long limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.You may Tire-Loading Information label. See “LoadingYour use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you maydrive Vehicle” in the Index. it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal Because of all the different ways people use theirGM driving limits. vehicles, maintenance needsvary. You may even need use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index. more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find in the schedules in this section.So please readthis Selecting the Right Schedule section and note how you drive.If you have any questions on’howto keep your vehiclein good First you’ll need to decide whichof the two schedulesis condition, see your Pontiac dealer. right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow: This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when youshould schedule them.If you go to your dealerfor your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service peoplewill perform the work using genuine GM parts.

..i Maintenance Schedule I Short Trip/City Definition I Short Trip/City Intervals Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Scheduleif my Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: Change (or 3 months, whichever occursfirst). Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 h). (or 6 months, whichever occursfirst). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) - Then Every 12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Tire Rotation. Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air-Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Most trips are through dustyareas. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. You frequently tow a trailerQT use a carrier on top of Supercharger Oil Check (or’every36 months, your vehicle. (With some models,you should never whichever occurs first)(3.8L Code 1 engine only). tow a trailer. See “Towinga Trailer” in the Index.) Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 h):Automatic Tramaxle If the vehicle is usedfor delivery service, police, Service (severe conditiom only). taxi, or other commercial application. Every 60,000 Miles (I00 000 km): Engine Accessory One of the reasom you should follow this schedule if you Drive Belt Inspection, operate your vehicleunder any of these conditions is that Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System these conditions cause engineoil to break down suoner. Service (or every 60 months, whichever.occurs fist). Spark Plug Wire Inspection. SparkPlug Replacement. These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the comglbte maintenance scheduleon the following pages. 7-4 Maintenance Schedule

Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none 01 the Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter conditions fromthe Short Trip/City Maintenance Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Schedule is true. Chassis Lubrication (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditionscauses engine oil to break At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) - Then Every down slower. 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Tire Rotation. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Supercharger Oil Check (or every36 months, whichever occursfirst) (3.8L Code 1 engine only). Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank,Cap and Lines Inspection. Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Cooling System Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first). Spark Plug Wire Inspection.Spark Plug Replacement. These intervalsonly summarize maintenanceservices. Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. 7-5 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) The services shownin this schedule up to100,000 miles 0Change engine oil and filter (or every (166 000 km)should be performed after. 100,000 miles 3 months, whichever occurs first). (166 000 h)at the sarne intervals. An Emission Control Sewice. Footnotes The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to performthis maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehidle'susehl life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

7-6 I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission ControlService. 0 Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contactpoints and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for. proper rotation patternand additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caber service procedures. t I I I DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Short lkip/City Maintenance Schedule I 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate the suspensionand steering 0Inspect air cleaner filter ifyou mare driving linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking & dusty conditions, Replace filterif brake cable guides and underbody contact necessary. An Eniission Control Sewice. ? points and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). II ,.

1,

I. : .. .. .- . .

, DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUALMILEAGE SEBVICED BY:

~

~ ~~ 743 .- I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I I 18,000 Miles.(30000 km) 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) c1. Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichevef occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. Cl Lubricate the suspension and steering -linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides .and underbody contact pointsand linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional inf'ormation. During tire rotation, check brake calipersfor Ereedom of movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures.

DATE . ACTUALMILEAGE SERVICED BY: I I Short TriplCity Maintenance, Schedule I ,-24,000Miles (40 000 km) 27,000 Miles (45-000km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, ',whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService. An Emission ControlService. 0Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occursfirst).

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-10 1 Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I 30,000 Miles (50,000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0For dupercharged engines only: Check the . 3 months, whichever occurs first). supercharger oil level and add oilas needed An Emission Control Service. (or every 36 months, whichever occurs CI Lubricate the suspension and steering first). See “Recommended Fluids and linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking Lubricants” in this section.An Emission brake cable guides and underbody contact Control Service. points and linkage (or every 6 months, 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and whichever occurs first). Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation 0Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission pattern and additional information. Control Service. During tire rotation, check brake calipers 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage for freedom of movement. Refer to the or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any appropriate GM service manual for proper damage. Replace parts as needed. caliper service procedures. An Emission Control Service. I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule ,I 33,000 Miles (55 000 km) ;36,000Miles (40 000 km) 0Change engine oil ,and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every . 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate the suspension and steering .I ' ,- linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points md linkage (or every 6 months, whichever OGCUTS first).

- DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVlCED BY: 1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 39,000 Miles (45 000 km) 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService, An-Emission ControlService. 0 Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index €orproper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedomof movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures.

I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BEI 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect air cleaner filter if youare driving 0Lubricate the suspension and steering in dusty conditions. Replace filter if linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking ~~XXSS~XY.An Emission Control Service. ? brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).

- - SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE' SERVICED BY: I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 50,OOO;Miles (83 000 km) 1 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) Change automatic transaxlefluid and filter 0Change engine oil and filter (or,every if the vehicleis mainly driven under oneor 3 months, whichever occurs first). more of these conditions: An Emission Control Sewi'ce.

..,';I. .:- '-. - In heavy city traffic wherethe outside

.. , ' "-1;.. .' ?.- -. ' -. :-. temperature regularly reaches90°F , .. . (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid andfilter donot require changing.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

~ 745 I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I

1 1 S4,OOO Miles (90 000 km) 57,000 Miles (95 000 km)

’ Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission ControlService. Lubricate the suspensionand steering linkage, tramaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contactpints and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the hdex for proper rotation patternand additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for fredom of movement. Refer to the appropriateGM smice mhual for proper caliper service procedures.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICEDBY:

7-16 I ’ Short ”rip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) CJ Change engine oil and filter (or every For supercharged enginesonly: Check the 3 months, whichever occurs first). supercharger oil level and add oilas needed An Emission ControlSewice. (or every 36 months, whichever occurs 0Lubricate the suspension and steering first). See‘‘Recommended Fluids and linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking Lubricants” in this section.An Emission brake cable guides and underbody contact Control Sewice. points and linkage (or every6 months, whichever occurs first). 0Inspect engine accessorydrive belt. An Emission Control Sewice. 0Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket forany DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Sewice.?

7-17 I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I 63,000 Miles (105 000 km) 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An EmissionControl Service. An Emission Control Sewice. c] Lubricate the: suspension and steering linkage, tramaxle ,shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and llllcterbody contact points and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0.Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Mex for proper rotation pattern and additional information.During .tire rotation, check brake calipers for kdom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures.

RATE ACTUAL MLLEAGE SERVICED BE DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: ~~ -~~

- .- . ,I ..I . '. .. I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) 72,000 Miles ((120 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every ' 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage' (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).

.. .: !" I I I I DATE ACTUALMILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7- 19 I Short ‘bip/CityMaintenance Schedule-1 78,000 Miles (I30 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Sewice. [7 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, in dusty conditions, Replace filter if transaxle shift linkage, garking brake cable necessary. An Emission Control Service. ‘f guides and undao8y contact pints and linkage (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first). 0 Rotate ,tires. See ‘‘Tire Inspection and Rotation” in-theIndex for proper rotation pattern and

. .. additional information, Ehwing tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures.

~~ DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED~~ BY:

7-20 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) 17 Change engine oiland filter (or every 0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService. An Emission ControlService. I7 Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage,. transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage (or every6 months, whichever occurs first).

‘DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: I I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

.. 7-21 1 I Short TriplCity Mahtenance'Schedule I I I S7,OOO Miles (145 !OOO ka) .90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emission Control Sewice. 0Lubricate the suspensionand steering linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage(or every 6 months, whichever ,occurs first). [III Replace air cleaner filter.An,Emission Control Service. Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket forany damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emissian Control Service. f DATE -ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-22 I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule 1 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) 0For supercharged engines only: Checkthe 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every supercharger oil level and add oil as needed 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 36 months, whicheveroccurs An Emission Control Service. first). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.An Emission 1, (.I<,, A: .” , --.-. ._r :’ . , .;,\ Control Service. -:.,;.<, ‘V! ,*. ; ., 0Rotate tires. See“Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manualfor proper caliper service procedures.

DATE SERVICEDACTUAL MILEAGE BY: DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

, I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I 96,000 Miles (160 000 .ha) '99,000 Miles (165 000 km) Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever moccursfirst). An Emission ControlSewice. ' An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate the suspension and steering' linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable guides and underbody contact points and linkage (dx every 6 months, whichever occurs first).

I RATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: -DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

! 9 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) ‘\ 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system 0 Change automatic transaxle fluidand filter (or every 60 months since last service, if the vehicle is mainly driven under oneor whichever occurs first). See “Engine . more of these conditions: I Coolant” in the Index for what to use. - In heavy city traffic where the outside Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, temperature regularly reaches90 OF pressure capand neck. Pressure test cooling (32°C) or higher. system and pressure cap.An Emission - In hilly or mountainous terrain. Control Sewice. 1 - When doing frequent trailer towing. 0Inspect spark plug wires.An Emission - Uses such as foundin taxi, police or Control Service. delivery service. Replace spark plugs.An Emission If YOU do not use your vehicle under any of these Control Service. c0nditions;thefluid andfilter donot.. , - require changing. .. I . , c. - , . .; ..i’ . . i. . ;- DATEACTUAL MILEAGE ‘SERVICEDBY:

7-25 i. 1 '- : :._': . -- 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) The services shownin this schedule up to100,000 miles Change engine oil and filter (or every (166 000 km) should be performed after100,000 miles 12 months, whichever occurs first). (166 000 km) at the same intervals. An Emission Control Service. Footnotes 0 Lubricate the suspension and steering Wge, The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the transaxle shift linkage, parking hake cable California Air Resources Board has determined that the .guides and underbucly contact points and linkage failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the 0 Rotate .tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" completion of the vehicle's usefd life. We, however, the and urge that all recommended maintenance services be in Index for proper rotation pattern performed at the indicated intervalsand the maintenance additional information. During tire rotation, be recorded. check brake calipersfor freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for ., i>T,T-, . ,. . .. proper caliper service procedures. . L. . , 8. :

b!.; dm.,. I (,LongTrip/Highway Main€enance Schedul’t 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) fl Change engine oil and filter (or every Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission ControlService. 17 Lubricate the suspension and steering El Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable brake cable guidesand underbody contact guides and underbody contact pints and linkage points and linkage (or every 12 months, (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). whichever occurs first). 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedomof movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures.

DATEACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule I 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0For supercharged enginesonly: Check the 12 months, whichever occurs first). supercharger oil level and add oil as needed An Emission Control Sewice. (or every 36 months, whichever occurs 0Lubricate the suspension and steering 9 first). See “Recommended Fluids and linkage, transaxleshift linkage, parking Lubricants” in this section. An Emission Control Service. ’~ brake cable guides and underbody contact 3- points and linkage (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission /.:.

Control Service. I 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket forany damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Sewice. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-28 ~~~ I Long Trip/Highway Maintmmce Schedule \ 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every. 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, 0Lubricate the suspension and steering transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking guides and underbody contact points and linkage brake cable guides and underbody contact (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). points and linkage (or every 12 months, 0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” whichever occurs first). in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional infomation. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for freedom of movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for

proper caliperservice procedures, I

DATE ACTUAL -MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-29 .. . 1 ’. ‘Jh. Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I I 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) 0'Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or 12 months, whichever occurs first). more of these conditions: An Emission Control Service. - In heavy city traffic where the 'outside, 0 Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, temperature regularly reaches90°F transaxle shift linkage, paking brake cable (32°C)or highc,. guides md underbody contact points and linkage (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). - III hilly or mountainous terrain. Rotate tires. See 'Tire Inspection md Rotation" - When doing frequent trailer towing. 0 in the Index for proper rotation pattern and - Uses such as found in taxi, police or additional infurmation. During tire rotation, delivery service.delivery I check brake calipers for freedom of movement. If you do nut use your vehicle under any of these Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for conditions, thefluid andfilterdo not require changing. proper caliper service procedures.

BATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission 0Lubricate the suspension and steering Control Service. linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage brake cable guides and underbody contact or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any points and linkage(or every 12 months, damage. Replaceparts as needed. whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. For supercharged engines only: Checkthe $’ r. supercharger oil level and add oil as needed I.. (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.An Emission Control Service.? I I I 3

I .I’ . DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: .- , i’ .. .. . ,‘ - .. -I -”?.

7-31 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule m 67,500 Mi1e.s (112 500 km) 75,000 Miles (125 009 km) 0 Change engine oil ;ind filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0 Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, 0Lubricate the suspension and steering transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking guides and underbody contact points and linkage brake cable guidesand underbody contact (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). points and linkage (or every12 months, 87 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” whichever occurs first). in the Index for proper rotation patternand additional information. During tire rotation, check brake calipersfor freedom of ‘movement. Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for proper caliper service procedures.

DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGESERVICED BY: ~ -

-

7-32 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months; whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission ControlService. 0 Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, 0Lubricate the suspension and steering transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable linkage, transaxle shift linkage, parking guides and underbody contact points and linkage brake cable guides and underbody contact (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). points and linkage (or every 12 months, 17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” whichever occurs first). in the Index for proper rotation pattern and Replace air cleaner filter.An Emission additional information.During tire rotation, Control Service. check brake calipers for fieedomof movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage proper caliper service procedures. or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission ControlService. f (Continued)

7-33 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) 0For supercharged engines only: Cheek the 0 Change engine oil and filter (or every supercharger oil level and add oil as needed 12 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 36 months, whichever occurs An Emission Control Service. first). See “Recommended Fluids and 0 Lubricate the suspension and steering linkage, Lubricants” in this section. An Emission transaxle shift linkage, parking brake cable Control Sewice. guides and underbody contact points and linkage (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and,Rotation” in the Index for properrotation pattem’and additional i&ormation. During tire rotation, check brake calipers for fieedomof movement. Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for proper caliper service procedures.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-34 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) El Drain, flush and refill cooling system 0 Change automatic transaxle fluidand filter (or every 60 months since last service, if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or whichever occurs first). See “Engine more of these conditions: Coolant’’ in the Indexfor what to use. - In heavy city traffic where the outside Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, temperature regularly ,reaches90 OF pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the (32 O C)or higher. cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission - In hilly or mountainous terrain. Control Sewice. - When doing frequent trailer towing. 0Inspect spark plug wires.An Emission Control Service. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. Replace spark plugs.An Emission Control Service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, thefluid andfilter donot require changing.

7-35 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Listed beloware owner checks and services which Check the wilidshield washer fluid levelin the should be performed at the intervals specified to help windshield washerta~& and add the properfluid if pnsure the safety, dependabilityand emission control necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid”in the performance of your vehicle. Index for further details. Besure any necessaryrepairs are completed at once. At Least Once a Msnth Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added your to vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Tire Inflation Check Part D. Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. At Each Fuel Fill See “Tires”in the Index forfurther detaik

It is important for you or a service station attendant to 1 Cassette Deck Service peq5or-m these underhoodchecks at each fuel fill. Clean cassette deck. Cleaningshould.be done every Engine Oil Level Check 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems”in the Index for furtherdetails. Check the engine oil level andadd the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil“ in the Index for Power Antenna Service Ik-tlier details. Clean power antenna mast. See“Audio Systems” in the Engine CoolantLevel Check Index for further details. Check the engine coolant levelad add the proper coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolm? in the Index for furtherdetails.

7-36 At Least %ice a Year At Least Oncea Year Restraint System Check Key Lock CylindersService Make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your' Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare specified in Part D. working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might Body Lubrication Service keep a safety belt system from doing job, its have it Lubricate all body door hinges.Also lubricate all hinges repaired. Have any tornor frayed safety belts replaced. and latches, including thosefor the hood, rear Also lookfor any opened or broken air bag covers', and ,compartment, glove box door, console door andany h,ave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system folding seat hardware.Part D tells you what to use. does not need regular mainteaance.) More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment: Automatic.nansaxle Check Check the trmsaxle fluid level; addif needed. See Y "Automatic Transaxle" in the Index. Afluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if.needed.

8. ,. I' ',I . . . '. ... - .. .. , , i , , -. : -". :. '.I.* .'. \ .~ . .. . ., Starter Switch Check Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock(BTSI) Check I 1

~~~ ~ When you are doing this check, the vehicle could When you are doingthis check, the vehicle could move suddenly.If it does, you or others couldbe move suddenly. If it does,YOU or others could be injured. Follow the steps below. injured. Follow the steps below.

~~ 1. Before ybu start, be sure you haveenough room 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough around the vehicle. room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see "Parking level surface. Brake" in the Indexif necessary) and the regular 2. Firmly apply thepaking brake (see "Parking Brake" brake. in the Index if necessary). NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be NOTE: Be ready to applythe regular brake ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter 3. With thel engineoff, turn the key to theRUN position, .__, . .,.,I 1. i. should work only PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). but don't start engine. Without applying the -, ..: . in the . .,, -%'. I .i. . . ~. + .. - . .. If the starter works in my other position, your regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of .> " '. vehicle needs service. PARK (P) with no& effort. E the shift lever moves ...+- out of PARE; (P)?your vehicle's BTSI needs service. Steering Column Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set the While parked,and with the parking brake set,try to turn the key to.LOCK in each shift lever position. parking brake. To check the parking brake: With the engine running The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in (P). and transaxlein NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot PARK pressure from the regular brake pedal.Do this until The key should come out only inLOCK. the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Parking Brake andAutomatic 'kansaxle PARK (P) To check the PARK (P) mechanism's holding ability: Mechanism Check with the enginerunning, shift toPARK (P). Then release all brakes. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to When you are doing this check, your vehicle clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris could begin to move. You or others could be can collect. injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to.rol1.Be ready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle begin to move.

7-39

.. I Part C: Periodic Maintenance connections, or other conditions which could causea heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaustfumes into Inspections the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust’’ inthe Index. Listed below are iqspections and services which should be performed at least twicea year (for instance, each Radiator and HeaterHose Inspection spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if are they service depkent or other qualified service center do cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairsare fittings and clamps; replace as needed. completed at once. Throttle Linkage Inspection Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a Pontiac service manual. See “Service and Inspect the throttle Wage for interference or binding, and Owner Publications” in the Index. for damage or missing parts. Replaceparts as needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or excessive wear. Steering, Suspension and Front- Wheel-Drive Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables. Axle Boot and Seal Inspection \ Brake System Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,signs of we&, or lack Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and of lubrication. Inspect the power steeringhs d hoses hoses’ for proper hookup, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wearand rotors for Clean and then inspect the drive axleboot seals for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary. wear and cracks. Inspect other brakepans, including ..- drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.

,-’;.. :-:: :I. -.:;Exhaust System Inspe,ction Check pvking brake adjustment.You may need to have _.3 ,. your brakes inspected more oftenif your cjriving habits .’Inspectthe complete exhaust system. Inspectthe body near the exhaust system. Lookfor broken, damaged, missing or or conditions result in frequent braking. out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose Part D: Recommended Fluids and USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Lubricants Coolant GM Part No. 3634621 or NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, Supplement equivalent with a complete flush part number or specification may be obtained from your Sealer and refill. GM dealer. Parking Brake Chassis lubricant (GM Part Cable Guides No. 1052497 or equivalent) or USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT lubricant meeting requirementsof Engine Oil Engine oil with the American NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor GC-LB. Gasoline Engines“S tarburst” L’ Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid symbol of the proper viscosity.To System (GM Part NO.1052884 - 1 Pt., determine the preferred’viscosity. 1050017 1 st., or equivalent). for your vehicle’s engine, see - ‘‘Engine Oil” in the Index. Automatic DEXRON@-III Automatic Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean water Transaxle Transmission Fluid. (preferably distilled) andGM Key Lock Multi-Puose Lubricant, Goodwrench@DEX-COOL or Cylinders Superlube%I (GM Part Havoline’ DEX-COOL TM No. 12344241 or equivalent). (orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze conforming toGM Specification 6277M. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.

1 ’ ’.

’ rl ~. I - ,.--. ,

- -L 7-41 I USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Supercharger Oil (GM Part izzizz Lubriplate lubricant aerosol NO. 12345982). See “Supercharger Assembly, (GM Part No. 12346293 or Oil” in the Index. Pivots, Spring equivalent) or lubricant meeting Anchor and requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Floor Shift Lubriplate Lubricant aerosol Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Linkage (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) orlubricant,meeting Hood and Multi-puqgose lubricant, requirements of NLGI Grade 2 Door Hinges, Superlube(GM Part Category LB or GC-LB. Fuel Door No. 12346241 or equivalent). Hinge and Re,a Chassis Chassis lubricant (GM Part Compartment Lubrication No. 1052497 or equivalent) or Lid Hinges lubricant meeting requirementsof NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM GC-LB. conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Windshield GM Optween* Washer Solvent See ‘‘Replacement Parts” in the Indexfor recommended Washer Solvent (GMPart No.4051515) or 1 replacement filters and spark plugs. equivalent. ,

7-42 , \ Part E: Maintenance Record Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance’” can be added on After the scheduled services are performed, record the the following record pages. Also, you should retainall date, odometer reading and who performed the service maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio in the boxes provided afterthe maintenance interval. is a convenient place to store them. Maintenance.Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record

7-44 I Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED SERVICED

.>.. ,".;I ,. .. . , ., -x, .; . .*.. , .. ,_ - .I ...... < \

7-45 Maintenance Record

E PERFORMED I

7-46 Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Hire you will find out how to contact Pontiacif you Pontiac Cares need assistance. This section also tellsyou how to obtain servicepublications and how to'report any safety , I.". .',_, .. _. , . * defects. I ,.1 . This section includes information on: 0 The Pontiac Cares Program A 0 The Customer Satisfaction Procedure 0 Customer Assistancefor Text Telephone (TTY) Users 0 Roadside Assistance 0 Courtesy Transportation 0 BBB Auto Line - Alternative Dispute Resolution Program 0 Reporting Safety Defects With the PONTIAC CARES program, you are never 0 Service and Owner Publications more than a phone call away from having your concern taken care of.

8-1 The PONTIACCARES philosophy and elements are Customer Satisfaction Procedure designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer, appreciatesyour purchase decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person .. . YOU! PONTIAC CAKES is: A valuable feature that comeswith every Pontiac, a feature that offers a multitudeof benefits that can giveyou safety, security, comfort and convenience. What makes up Pontiac Cares? A 3 year/36,000 mile Bumper to BumperWarranty 0 RoadsideAssistance

0 CourtesyTransportation All of these elements combine to make your driviag experience an enjoyable one, and are discussedin greater detail faher in your owner's manual. Pontiacis focusing on the changing needsof our customers and is committed in giving you exceptional levelof an Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your customer care throughout the ownership experience. dealer and Pontiac. Nomdy, any concern you may Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasmin our have with your vehicle can be handled by your selling product and our services, and make you the most or servicing dealer.Your dealer the facility, satisfied customerin the world. has trained technicians, special toolsand up-to-date information to promptly address anyissue which may arise. Pontiachas empowered its dealers tomake any decisions and repair vehicles, and they are eager to resolveyour concern to pur complete satisfaction.If your concern has not been 0 In theBahamas: 1-800-389-0009 , resolved to your satisfaction, take the following steps: 0 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British STEP ONE -- Discuss youq concern witha member VirginIslands: 1-800-534-0122 ' of dealer management. Normally, concerns can be In all other Caribbean countries: 1-809-763- 1315 quickly resolved, at that level:If the matter has already been reviewed with the Sales, Service,or Parts Manager, In other overseas locations, callGM North American contact the owner of the dealership or the General Export Sales in Canada at 1-905-644-4112 Manager. For prompt assistance, please have the following STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of information available to give the Customer A,ssistance dealership management,it appears your concern cannot Representative: be resolved by the dealership without further help, Your name, address, home and business. telephone contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by numbers calling 1-800-PM-CARES. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Assisiance Centerin Oshawa by Vehicle Identification Number (Thisis available calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 from the vehicle registration or title,or the plate at (French). the top left -of the instrument paneland visible through the windshield.) For help outsideof the United States and Canada, call the following numbers as appropriate: 0 Dealership name and location In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage In herto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 0 Nature of concern 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4 135 (English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) We encourage you to call usso we'can giveyour inquiry Lustorner Assistance for Text prompt. attention., However,if you wish to write Pontiac, write to: Telephone (TTY) Users United States To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired aid who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Pontiac Division Pontiac hasTTY equipment available atits Customer

'Customer Assistance Center Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with ii...:: One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-POW. (TTY users in i. ??:: t. Pontiac,, MI 48340-2952 Canada cafldial 1-800-263-3830.) Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center,163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Idormation booklet for addressesof Canadian and 'GM Overseas offices. When contacting Pontiac, please remember that ydur concern will likely be resolvedin the dealership,using the dealer's facilities, equipmentand personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you havea concern. Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program Pontiac's Roadside Assistance toll-free numberis staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day,365 days a year. We take anxiety out ofuncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phonemaking or arrangements to tow your vehicleto the nearest Pontiac dealer.

,. =...... We willprovide the following services for . .__.I . .- . 3 years/36,000 miles, atno expense to you: 0 Vehicle out of fuel -7 0 Keys locked in vehicle e Tow to nearest dealershipfor warranty service e Change a flat tire 0 Jump starts 0 'Courtesy Transportation-- See Pontiac Courtesy Transportation sectionfor details Security While You Travel 1-8OO-ROADSDJ (1-800-762-3743) As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside Assistance program.This value-added service is intended to provide you with peaceof mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road. We have quick, easy accessto telephone numbers of the Pontiac .reserves the rightto limit servicesor following additional services dependingon your needs: reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac's judgement the claims become excessivein frequency or Hotels type of occurrence. Glassreplacement While we hope thatyou never have the occasion to use Rental vehicle or taxis our service, it is added security whiletraveling for you Police, fire department or hospitals and your family. Remember, we're only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance-- 1-800-ROADSIDE In many instances, rnechanical.failures are covered or 1-800-762-3743. under Pontiac's comprehensive warranty. However, when other services are utilized, our advisorswill ' - - "'an Roadside Assistance explain any payment obligationsyou might incur. Vehicles purchasedin Canada have an extensive For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please Roadside Assistance Program 'accessible from anywhere provide the following informationto give the advisor: in Canada or the United States. Please referto the separate brochure providedby the dealer or call a Location of vehicle 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Telephone number of your location' Vehicle model, year and color Mileage of vehicle Vehicle identification number Vehicle license plate number Pontiac Courtesy Transportation It applies to any repair covered underthe 36 month/36,000 mile(60 000 km) limited warranty, and to any 1996 Pontiac requiring repair as a resultof product recall or special policy situations. For same day service, you are entitled to one-way shuttle serviceof up to 10 miles (16 km). If the repairs requirean overnight stay for the car, you're entitled to either a Pontiac loaner or reimbursementfor a rental car, upto $3O/day, for up to five days. Some state insurance regulations makeit impractical to rent vehicles to people under21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty rentinga vehicle, Pontiac will reimburse you, up to $3O/dayfor any documented transportation you receive.transportation you .. ...

I I Forwarranty repairs during the CompleteVehicle .:;, ~ ...' 1 Coverage period in'the New Vehicle Limited Warranty;k'':- 'i 1 .? Pontiac strives to give you a worry free ownershipof interim transportation maybe available under the .:. r' .,' ..'.. , your vehicle,and we realize the inconvenienceof being Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your without a car. So Pontiac has come up with a way to dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is . ~ .-, . eliminate any frustrations you might have when trying available only in the United States or Canada. . .. . -, . -1 . .. to get a ride to work,or wondering how you will get .,* 'i : j home. Well, your worriesare over. Pontiac provides .... - no-cost transportation when you bring your 19% Pontiac in for warranty service.

i

8-7 I GM Participation, BB,&AUT() BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program LINE' Palternative .mpu$e administered by the ,Better Business Bureau systemto ., settle disputes between customersand automobile Resolution Program* manufacturers. This program is available free of charge to customers who currently ownor lease a GM vehicle. *This program may not be availablein all states, depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to your If you are not satisfied after followingthe Customer Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet. Satisfaction Procedure,yola may contact the BBB wing General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility the toll-free telephone number,or write them atthe limitations and/or to discontinue itsparticipationin this following address: PrOgrm. BBB AUTO LINE Both Pontiac and your Pontkc dealer are cokunitted to Council of Better Business Bureaus making sure you are completely satisfiedwith your new 4200 Wilson Boulevard vehicle. Our experience hasshown that, if a situation Suite 800 arises whereyou fe'el your concernhas not been Arlington, VA 22203 adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlierin this section is very Teleph'one: 1-800-955-5 100 successful. To file a claim, yon will be asked to provide your name There may be instances wherean impartial thirdparty and address, your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), can assist in arriving at a solutionto a disagreement and 'a statement of the nature of your complaint. regarding vehicle repairs or interpretationthe.New of Eligibility is.limited by vehicle age and mileage,and

Vehicle Limited Wmty.To assist in resolving these factors.other . , . . :.:,. .. ., disagreements, Pontiac voluntarily participatesin ~$.

BBB AUTO LINE. .. 1:. ' i 1 .y; :' " . 1., 7._.

.; .; Q-

8-8 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact theBBB at any time. The BBB will attempt TO THE UNITED STATES to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary GOVERNMENT between you and Pontiac. If this mediationis If you believe ,. thatyour vehicle has a defect which could unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should where eligible customers may present their casean to immediately inform the National Highway Traffic impartial third-party arbitrator. Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to The arbitrator will make a decision whichyou may notifying General Motors. accept or reject.If you accept the decision,GM will be If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution investigation, if it finds that a safety defect exists in procedure should ordinarily take about40 days from the and a groupof vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy time you file a claim untila decision is made. campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved Some state laws may require you to this use program in individual problems between you,your dealer, or before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program General Motors. or in the courts. For further information, contact the To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety BBB at 2-800-955-5100 or the Pontiac Customer Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123in the Assistance Center at1-800-PM-CARES. Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS RFPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS- TO THE CANADIAN TO GENERAL MOTORS GOVERNMENT In addition to notifymg NHTSA (or Transport Canada) If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle in a situation like:this, we certainly hope you'll notify has a safety defect, you should~immediately notify us. Please callUS at 1-80O-PM-CARESor write:

Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Pontiac Division . ,, Motors sf Canada Limited.You may write to: Customer Assistance Center -TraqsportCanada One hn&c Plaza Pontiac, MI Box 8880 48340-2952 Ottawa, Ontario K1G 3J2 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) ar 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center 1908 Co180nelSam Drive Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8W Service and Owner Publications Service Manuals Service manuals contain diagnostic and repair information for all chassis and body systems. Theymay be useful for owners who wish to get a greater understanding of their vehicle. They are also usefulfur owners with the appropriateskill level or training who wish to perform “do-it-yourself” sewice. These are authentic General Motors service manuals meant for professional, qualified technicians.

I, Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manualsand ,. other service literature are availablefor purchase for all .. current and many past model General Motors vehicles. Toll-free telephone numbers for ordering information: United States ...... 1-800-551-4123 Canada ...... i -800-668-5539 Service Bulletins Owner.I Publications Service bulle@s covering various subjects are regularly Owner's manuals, warranty folders and various owner sent to all General Motors dealerships.GM monitors assistance booklets provide ownerswith general product performancein the field. When service methods operation and maintenance information. are found which promote better service GMon vehicles, bulletins are createdto help the technician perform better service. Service bulletins may involve any number of vehicles. Some will describe inexpensive service; others will describe expensive service. Some will advise of new or unexpected conditions, and others may help avoid future costlyrepairs. Service bulletins are meant for qualified technicians.In some cases bulletins refer to servicemanuals, specialized tools, equipment and safety procedures necessary to service L\ the vehicle. Since these bulletins are issuedthroughout +, the model year and beyond, an index is required and published quarterly to help identify specific bulletins. Subscriptions are available. You can order an index at the toll-free numbers listed previously, askor a GM dealer to seean index or individual bulletin.

8-12 v Section 9 Index

~~ I Acceisory mator ...... 2.54. 5.25 Anti-Lockout Feature ...... 2-6 Accessory Power Outlet ...... 2-52 AppearanceCare ...... 6-49 Adjustable Support Seat ...... 1-3 Appearance Care Materials ...... 6-56 AirBag .:...... l-16 Arbitration Program ...... 8-9 .How Does it Restrain ...... 1-20 Armrest.Storage ...... 2-49 How it Works ...... 1-18 Ashtrays ...... 2-53 . Location ...... 1-18 Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Touch Control ...... 3-25 Readiness Light ...... 1-17, 2-63 Audio Equipment. Adding ...... 3-26 Servicing ...... 1 -2 1 Audio Systems ...... 3-9 What Makes it Inflate ...... 1-19 Automatic What Will You See After it Inflates ...... 1-20 Overdrive ...... 2-23 When Should it Inflate ...... 1-19 Shifting ...... 2-21 Aircleaner ...... 6-17 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-18 AirConditioning ...... 3-5 Transaxle ...... 2-21 Air Conditioning Refrigerants ...... 6-66 Transaxle Check ...... 7-37 Air Inflator ...... 2-54, 5.25 Transaxle Fluid ...... 6-20 Alarm, Universal Theft-Deterrent ...... 2- 14 Transaxle Operation ...... 2-21 Alignment and Balance, Tire ...... 6-47 Transaxle Park Mechanism Check...... 7-39 Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ...... 6-54 Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-4 Antenna, Fixed ...... 3-28 Antenna. Power ...... 3-28 Antifreeze ...... 6-23 Anti-Lock I Back-up amp Monitor ...... 2-80 Brake System Waming Light ...... 2-66, 4-6 Back-up Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-37 Brakes ...... 4-6 Battery ...... 6-3 1 Canadian Roadside Assistance ...... 8-6 Jump Starting ...... ! ...... 5-2 Capacities and Specifications ...... 6-65 Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2- 10 CarbonMonoxide ...... 2-31.4-29. 4-35 Saver ...... '...... 2-45 Cassette Deck Service ...... 7.36 WarningLight ...... 2-64 Cassette Tape Player ...... 3- 11. 3-15 Warnings ...... 5-2 Cassette Tape Player Care ...... 3-27 BBB Auto Line ...... 8-8 Cassette Tape Player Errors ...... 3.13. 3.16 Belt. Engine Accessory ...... 6-67. 6-68 CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-23 Better Business Bureau Mediation ...... 8-9 Center Passenger Position ...... 1-23 BoostGage ...... 2-75 Certification Label ...... 4-30 Brake CertificationRire Label ...... 4-30 Adjustment ...... 6-3 1 Chains.Safety ...... 4-35 Fluid ...... 6-28 Chains.Tire ...... 6-48 LampMonitor ...... 2-80 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-26 Master Cylinder ...... 6-28 Check Engine Light ...... 2-69 Parking ...... 2-26 Check Gages Light ...... 2-74 PedalTravel ...... 6-31 Check Gages Messages ...... 2-79 Replacing System Parts ...... 6-3 1 Check Oil LevelMessage ...... 2-79 System Warning Light ...... 2-65 Check Oil Level Warning Light ...... 2-72 Trailer ...... 4-35 Check Washer Fluid Message ...... 2-79 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check ...... 2-30. 7-38 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...... 1-43 Wear ...... 6-30 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 6-55 Brakes. Anti-Lock ...... 4-6 ChildRestraints ...... 1-32 Braking ...... 4-5 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position ...... 1-34 Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-9 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position ...... 1-36 Break-In. New Vehicle ...... 2- 16 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position ...... 1-38 Brightness Control ...... 2-44 TopStrap ...... 1-33 BTSI Check ...... 2-30. 7-38 Where to Put ...... 1-32 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-32 Cigarette Lighter ...... 2-53

9-2 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ...... 6-59 Coolant ...... 6-22 Cleaner. Air ...... : ...... 6-17 Heater, Engine ...... 2-20 Cleaning Recovery Tank ...... 5-19 Aluminum Wheels ...... 6-54 Cooling System ...... 5-17 Fabric ...... 6-50 Courtesy Transportation ...... 8-7 Glass ...... 6-52 Cruise Control . :...... 2-37 Inside of Your Pontiac ...... 6-49 Cupholders ...... 2-49 Instrument Panel ...... 6-52 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users...... ,8-4 Leather ...... 6-5 1 Customer Assistance Information ...... 8-1 Outside of Your Pontiac ...... 6-53 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ...... 8-2 Special Problems ...... 6-50 Stains ...... 6-50 Tires ...... 6-54. Damage. Finish ...... 6-54 Vinyl ...... 6-51 Damage. Sheet Metal ...... 6-54 Wheels ...... 6-54 Daytime Running Lamps ...... 2-42 Windshield and Wiper Blades ...... 6-52 DeadBattery ...... 5-2 Climate Control,Standard ...... -3- 1 Defects. Reporting Safety ...... 8-9 Clock, Setting the ...... 3-9 DefensiveDrivin ...... 4-1 Coinholder ...... 2-49 Defogger.Rear Vfindow ...... 3-8 . .. Comfort Controls ...... 3-1 Defogging ...... 3-8 Compact Disc Care ...... 3-27 Defrosting ...... 3-8 Compact Disc Player ...... 3 - 18, 3-20 Delayed Illumination ...... 2-44 Compact Disc Player Errors...... 3-19,3. -22 DIC.'...... 2-79 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-38 Dimen8ions.Vehicle ...... 6-66 Compass,Electronic ...... 2-8 1 Dolby B Noise Reduction ...... 3-14, 3-17 Computer Command Ride ...... 2-25 Door Console Storage ...... 2-49 Ajar Message ...... 2-79 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-5 Locks ...... 2-3 Convenience Net ...... 2-52 Drive Position. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-23 Convex Outside Mirror ...... 2-48 Driver Information Center ...... 2-79 Driver Position ...... 1-10

9-3 .. .;,. I:...... ! .. L ..__...... -~~ ...... -.-- Driving Fuse Block (Passenger’s Side) ...... 6-61 City ...... 4-20 Identification ...... 6-57 Defensive ...... 4-1 Oil Level Check ...... 7-36 . Drunken ...... ,...... 4-2 Overheating ...... 5-15 Freeway ...... , ...... 4-21 Running WeParked ...... 2-31 In a Blizzard ...... 4-28 Specifications ...... 6-66 . In Foreign Countries ...... 6.-4 Starting YOW ...... 2-18 IntheRain ...... 4-1.7 Supercharged ...... 6-12 Night ...... 4-15 Engine Oil ...... 6-12 Oncurves ...... I...... 4-10 Adding ...... 6-14 On Grades While Towing a Trailer ...... 4-37 Additives ...... 6-15 On Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-23 Checking ...... 6-13 On Snow and Ice ...... 4-26 Pressure Gage ...... 2-73 Through Water ...... 4- 19 Pressure Light ...... 2-71 WetRoads ...... 4-17 Used ...... 6-16 Winter ...... 4-25 When to Change ...... 6-16 With a Trailer ...... 4-36 Ethan01 ...... 6-3 Drunken Driving ...... , ...... 4-2 Exhaust, Engine ...... 2-31 Exit Lighting ...... 2-44 Express-Down Window ...... 2-33 Electrical Equipment, Adding ...... 2.19.3.26. 6.58 Express-Open Sunroof ...... 2-55 Electrical System ...... :...... 6-58 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror ...... 2-46 Electronic Climate Control ...... 3-3 . Fabric Cleaning ...... 6-50 Electronic Compass ...... 2-8 1 Fan Control. Climate Control System ...... 3-1. 3-3 Electronic Level Control ...... 4-51 FillingYowTank ...... 6-5 Engine ...... ,...... 6-10. 6-11 Filter. Air ...... 6-17 Accessory Belt ...... 6-67, 6-68 Finish Care ...... 643 Coolant .... ’...... 6-22 FinishDamage ...... 6-54 Coolant Heater ...... : ...... 2-20 First Gear, Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-24 Coolant Level Check ...... 7-36 Flashers. Hazard Warning ...... 5-1 Coolant Temperature Gage ...... 2-68 Flash-to-Pass Feature ...... 2-35 Exhaust ...... 2-31 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 5-26 Fuse Block (Driver’s Side)...... 6-59 Fluid Capacities ...... 6-65 9-4 Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-41 Halogen Bulbs ...... 6-32 Fog Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-35 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 5-1 Fog Lamps ...... 2-43 HeadRestraints ...... 1-4 Foreign Countries. Fuel ...... 6-4 Headlamps ...... 2-41 French Language Manual ...... ii Bulb Replacement ...... 6-32 FrontTowing ...... 5-10, 5-12 High/Low Beam- Changer ...... 2-35 Fuel ...... 6-2 On Reminder ...... 2-41 Canada ...... 6-3 Wiring ...... 6-58 DoorLock ...... 6-4 Head-Up Display ...... 2-76 Door Release ...... 6-8 Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance ...... 8-4 Filling Your Tank ...... 6-5 Heating ...... 3-6 Gage ...... 2-75 High-Beam Headlamps ...... 2-35 In Foreign Countries ...... 6-4 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-23 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...... 6-59 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-23 Hitches. Trailer ...... ; ...... 4-35 Hood Gages Checking Things Under ...... 6-8 Boost ...... 2-75 Release ...... 6-9 &gjne Coolant Temperature ...... 2-68 Hood Ajar Message ...... 2-79 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 2-73 Horn ...... 1 ...... 2-33 . Fuel ...... 2-75 HUD ...... 2-76 Speedometer ...... ;...... 2-61 Hydroplaning ...... 4-19 . Tachometer ...... 2-62 GAWR ...... 4-30 Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-21 Ignition Switch ...... 2-17 GloveBox ...... 2-4 9 Illuminated Entry ...... 2-44 Graphic Equalizer ...... 3-15, 3-20 Inflation. Tire ...... 6-42 Gross Axle Weight Rating ...... 4-30 Inflator.Air ...... 2-54 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...... 4-30 Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror ...... 2-46 Guide en Frarqais ...... ii GVWR ...... 4-30

_. 9.5' Inspections Monitor Message ...... 2-80 Brake System ...... 7-40 ClnReminder ...... I...... ,.i 2-41 Exhaust Systems ...... 7-40 Leaving Your Vehicle ...... 2-6 Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot ...... 7-40 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ...... 2-29 Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal ...... 7-40 Level Control, Electronic ...... 4-31 Radiator and Heater Hose ...... 7-40 Light Sensor, Twilight Sentinel ...... ; ...... 2-43 Steering ...... 7-40 Lighter ...... 2-53 Suspension ...... 7-40 Lights Throttle Linkage ...... 7-40 Air Bag Readiness ...... 1-17, 2-63 InstrumentPanel ...... 2-56 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning...... 2-66, 4-6 .9 .9 Brightness Control ...... 2-44 . Battery Warning ...... 2-64 Cleaning ...... 6-52 Brake System Warning ...... 2-65 Cluster ...... 2-58 Check Engine ...... 2-69 FuseBlock ...... 6-59 Check Gages ...... 2-74 InteriorLamps ...... 2-4 Engine Oil Pressure Light ...... 2-71 Interior ...... 2-44 LOW Coolant Warning ...... 2-68 Jack. Tire ..... Low Washer Fluid ...... 2-74 Jump Starting ... . Oil Level Warning ...... 8...... 2-72 Safety Belt Reminder ...... ’ ... 1-5, 2-63 Key Lock Cylinders Service ...... 7-37 Traction Control System Warning ...... 2-67. 4-8 Key Reminder Warning ...... 2-1 8 Traction Off Warning ...... 2-67, 4-8 Keys ...... 2-1 Loading YourVehicle ...... 4-30 Locks Anti-LockoutFeature ...... 2-6 ]Labels Automatic Door ..; ...... 2-4 Certification ...... 4-30 Door ...... 2-3 Certification/”ire ...... 4-30 FuelDoor ...... 6-4 Service Parts Identification ...... 6-57 Key Lock Cylinder Service ...... 7-37 Tire-Loading Information ...... 4-30 PowerDoor ...... 2-4 Vehicle Identification Number ...... 6-57 Rear Door Security ...... 2-6 Lamps ...... 2-41 Steering Column Lock Check ...... 7-39 Courtesy ...... 2-44 Tkunk ...... 2-11 ...... 2-44 Law Coolant Message ...... ’2-79

. L- ...... _. I .. .. , ...... Low CoolantWarning Light ...... 2-68 Mountain Roads ...... '...... 4-23 Low Washer Fluid Light ...... 2-74 Lubricants and Fluids ...... 7-41 Lubrication Service. Body ...... 7-37 Net. Convenience ...... 2-52 LumbarControls ...... 1-2 Neutral. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-22 NewVehicle Break-In ...... 2-16 Night Vision ...... 4-16 Magnasteer" ...... 4-9 MaintenanceRecord ...... 7-43 Maintenance Schedule ...... 7- 1 Odometer ...... 2-61 Long Tripmighway Definition ...... 7-5 Odometer. Trip ...... 2-61 Long Tripmighway Intervals ...... 7-5 Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-12 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-36 . Oil Level Warning Light ...... 2-72 Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 7-40 Oil Pressure Light ...... 2-71 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...... 7-41 Oil. Engine ...... 6-12 Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-3 Oil. Supercharger ...... 6-19 Short Trip/City Definition ...... 7-4 Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-23 Short Trip/City Intervals ...... 7-4 Overheating Engine ...... 5-15 Maintenance When Trailer Towing ...... 4-38 Owner Checks and Services ...... 7-36 Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts ...... 6-66 Owner Publications. Ordering ...... 8-11 Maintenance. Underbody ...... 6-55 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...... 2-69 Paint Spotting. Chemical ...... 6-55 Manual Front Seat ...... 1-1 Park Manual Remote Control Mirror ...... 2-47 AutomaticTransaxle ...... 2-21 Maxifuse/Relay Center ...... 6-58 Shifting Into ...... 2-27 Methanol ...... 6-3 Shifting Out of ...... 2-30 Mirrors ...... 2-46 Parking Convex Outside ...... : ...... 2-48 AtNight ...... 2-13 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview ...... 2-46 Brake ...... 2-26 Inside Daymight Rearview ...... 2-46 Brake Mechanism Check ...... 7-39 Mmnal Ranope Control ...... 2-47 Lots ...... 2-13 Power Remote Control ...... 2-48 Over Things That Burn ...... 2-30 Visor Vanity ...... 2-54 With a Trailer ...... 4-38 MMT ...... 6-3 Passing ...... 4-12 9-7

d

safetyExtender Belt ...... 1-43 ManualFront ...... 1-1 SafetyBelts ...... 1-5 Power ...... 1-2 Adults ...... 1-9 Restraint Systems ...... 1-1 Care ...... 6-52 Seat Controls ...... 1-2,1-3 Center Passenger Position ...... 1-23 Securing a Child Restraint ...... 1-34 Children ...... 1-30 Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle ...... 2-24 Driver Position ...... 1. 10 Security Messages ...... -2-79 Extender ...... 1-43 SecuritySystem ...... 2-15 How to Wear Properly ...... 1-9 Service ...... 6-1 IncorrectUsage ...... 1.12.1.41. 1.42 Bulletins, Ordering ...... 8-11 LapBelt ...... 1-23 Manuals, Ordering ...... 8-11 Lap-Shoulder ...... : ...... 1.10. 1.24 . Parts Identification Label ...... 6-57 LargerChildren ...... 1-40 Publications, Ordering ...... 8-11 Questions and Answers ...... 1-9 Work, Doing Your Own ...... 6-1 Rear Comfort Guides ...... 1-27 Service and Appearance Care ...... 6-1 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions...... 1-24 Service and Owner Publications ...... 8-11 Rear Seat Passengers ...... 1-24 Service Publications ...... 8-11 ReminderLight ...... 1.5. 2.63 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac ...... 1-21 Replacing After a Crash ...... 1-43 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 6-54 Right Front Passenger Position...... 1-22 Shift Lever ...... 2-27, 2-28 .Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster...... 1. 11 Shifting Smaller Children and Babies ...... 1-30 AutomaticTrarisaxle ...... 2-21 Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-22 Into Park (P) ...... 2-27 Why They Work ...... , ... 1-6 Out of Park ...... 2-30 Safety Chains ...... 4-35 Performance ...... 2-25 Safety Defects. Reporting ...... 8-9... Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...... 1-11 Safety Warnings and Symbols ...... 111 Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement ...... 6-36 ...... , ... ,,Scheduled Maintenance Services ...... 7-3 Signaling Turns ...... 2-34 Seatback Skidding ...... 4-14 .... Sound Equipment, Adding 3-26 .... Power Recliner ...... 1-3 ...... :. RecliningFront ...... 1-3 Spare Tire? Compact ...... 5-38 ".Seats Specificahom and Capacities ...... 4-65 Adjustable Support ...... 1-3 Specifications, Engine ...... 6-66 Speech Impaired, Cusimner Assistance 8-4 Lumbar Control ...... 1-2 ...... Speedometer ...... : . 2-61 THEFTLOCK" ...... 3-23 SRS ...... 1-16 Thermostat ...... 6-26 Stains. Cleaning ...... 6-50 Tilt Steering Wheel ...... 2-33 Starter Switch Check ...... 7-38 Time. Setting the ...... 3-9 Starting Your Engine ...... 2-18Tire Chains ...... 6-48 Steam ...... 5-15 TireLoading ...... 4-30 Steering ...... 4-9Tire-Loading Information Label ...... 4-30 ColumnLockCheck ...... 7-39 Tires ...... 6-41 In Emergencies ...... 4-10 Alignmentand Balance ...... 6-47 Magnasteer TM ...... 4-9 BuyingNew ...... 6-45 Power ...... Chains4-9 ...... 6-48 Tips ...... 4-10 Changing a Flat ...... 5-26 Wheel Touch Controls ...... 3-25 Cleaning ...... 6-54 Wheel. Tilt ...... 2-33 Compact Spare ...... 5-38 Storage Areas ...... 2-49 Inflation ...... 6-42 Storage. Vehicle ...... 6-31 Inflationcheck ...... 7-36 Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow ...... 5-39 Inspection and Rotation ...... 6-43 SunVisors ...... 2-53 Loading ...... 4-30 Sunglasses Storage ...... ; ...... 2-50 Pressure ...... : ...... 6-42 Sunroof ...... 2-55 Temperature ...... 6-46 Supercharged Engine ...... 6- 12 Traction ...... 6-46 Superchargeroil ...... 6-19 Treadwear ...... 6-46 Supplemental Restraint System ...... 1-16Uniform Quality Grading ...... 6-45 Symbols. Vehicle ...... v Wear Indicators ...... 6-44 Wheel Replacement ...... 6-47 When It's Time for New ...... 6-44 Tachometer ...... 2-62 TopStrap ...... 1-33 Torque Lock 2-29 Taillap Lock...... 6-37 Torque ...... TapePlayerCare ...... 3-27 Torque.5-34. Wheel Nut ...... 6-65 Temperature control. Climatesystem control .....3-3 3-27Trailer a Towing ...... 4-32 TheaterDimming ...... 2-44 . ~~~h~Your Vehicle ...... 5-7 Theft ...... 2-13 Theft-Deterrent Alarm System ...... 2- 14 Traction Control SystemWarning Light ...... 4-82-67. Theft-Deterrent Feature.Theft-Deterrent Audio ...... 3-23 Off Warning Light ...... 2-67. 4-8 9-10 Trailer Underbody Flushing Service ...... 7-39 .Brakes ...... 4-35 Underbody Maintenance ...... 6-55 Driving on Grades ...... 4-37 Universal Theft-Deterrent System ...... 2-14 Drivingwith ...... 4-36 -Hitches ...... 4-35 Maintenance When Towing ...... 4-38 Vehicle Parking on Hills ...... 4-38 Control ...... 4-5 Safety Chains ...... 4-35 DamageWarnings ...... iv Tongueweight ...... 4-34 Dimensions ...... 6-66 Total Weight on Tires ...... 4-34 Identification Number ...... 6-57 Towing ...... 4-32. Loading ...... 4-30 Turn Signals ...... 4-37 Storage ...... 6-31 . Weight ...... 4-33 Ventilation System ...... 3-6 Transaxle Fluid, Automatic ...... 6-20 Visor Vanity Mirrors ...... 2-54 Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry ...... 2-7 Visors. Sun ...... 2-53 Transportation, Courtesy ...... 8-7 Voltmeter ...... 2-64 Trip Odometer ...... 2-61 Tiunk \ warning Devices ...... 5-2 Ajar Message ...... 2-79 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ...... 2-62 Lock ...... 2-11 Washer Fluid Message ...... 2-79 Release, Remote ...... 2-1 1 Washer Fluid. Windshield ...... 6-27 Security Override...... 2-12 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 6-53 TTYUsers ...... 8-4 Weatherstrips ...... 6-53 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals ...... 2-34 Wheel Turn Signal On Chime ...... 2-35 Alignment ...... 6-47 Turn Signal Message, Bulb Monitor ...... 2-80 Nut Torque ...... 5-34. 6-65 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ...... 2-34 Replacement ...... 6-47 Turn Signals When Towinga Trailer ...... 4-37 Wrench ...... 5-27 Twilight Sentinel...... 2-43 T- L. .... I I ...... - ... ,. i ...... l?... ._...... \I., .....1 Windows ...... 2-32 Windshield Wiper, ...... 2-36 .. Express-Down ...... 2-33 BladeReplacement ...... 6-41 . Power ...... ,...... ,...... 2-32 Fuses ...... 6-58 WindshieldWasher ...... 2-37 Winter Driving ...... 4-25 Fluid...... -2-37,6-27Wiring,Headlamp ...... 6-58 Fluid Level Check ...... 7-36 Wrecker Towing ...... 5-7 Wrench,Wheel ...... 5-27

9-12 -_